Eagle Point Menu by Eagle Point

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of the vendor. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may
be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Eagle Point has carefully prepared this program package, including research, development, and testing to
ascertain its effectiveness and accuracy. However, no warranty of any kind is made with respect to this
program package or its related material, except as may be expressly stated in the licensing agreement or
other contractual document. In no event is Eagle Point liable for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of this program package.
The installation program used to install Eagle Point software, InstallShield, is licensed software provided
by InstallShield Software Corporation.
ColorFast™, RoadCalc™, LANDCADD™, Virtual Simulator™, as well as the ColorFast™ and Eagle Point
logos, are unregistered trademarks of Eagle Point.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.
Windows® and DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other registered or
unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Copyright © Q3, 2005, by Eagle Point. All rights reserved.
EAGLE POINT
MENU TA B L E

OF

CONTENTS
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Intelligent Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Advanced Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
New Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
New Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Create Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Project Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Project Properties – Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Project Properties – History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
History Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Project Properties – Manifest Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Project Properties – Client Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Properties Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MicroStation V8 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cell Library and Design File Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Interaction with Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Level Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Accusnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Table of Contents i
 Save as V7 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Point Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Angular Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Degree of Curvature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Linear Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Mixed Linear Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Planimetric Area Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Horizontal Direction Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Azimuths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Geometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Nodes Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Stationing Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Angular Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Linear Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Planimetric Area Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dry Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wet Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Station/Offset Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Default CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Select Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
New Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Delete Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Node (Field Code) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
QuickSteps (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
QuickSteps (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Manage Field Code Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
New Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Import Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ASCII File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Export Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
New Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
New Field Code (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Node (Field Code) Library Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Node (Field Code) Library Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Attribute Styles Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
New Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

ii Eagle Point Menu

 New Attribute Style (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Modify Attribute Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Modify Attribute Item (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Show Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Delete Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Global Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
External Node Database – Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Graphic and Database, Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
External Node Database – Lock Nodes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
External Node Database – Reserve Nodes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 85
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Browse Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Update Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Confirm New and Changed Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Confirm Changed Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Confirm New Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
EGPT Command Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Products Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dynamic Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dialogs on Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Embedded CAD Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

4 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Manage Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
New Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Modify Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copy Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Manage Level Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
New Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Modify Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Copy Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manipulate Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manipulate Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Layer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
List Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Set Current Layer by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Freeze Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Turn Off Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Table of Contents iii

 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Isolate Object Layer By Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Object Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Current Layer by Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Current Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Thaw Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Turn On Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On and Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Level Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Level Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
List Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Set Active Level by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn Off Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Isolate Object Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Active Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Level Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Turn On Previous Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Turn On All Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Plot Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rotate View Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Capture Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Launch CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preview Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Converting Nodes from Softdesk/Land Development
Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

5 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Advanced Irrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Base Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ColorFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

iv Eagle Point Menu

 Irrigation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Landscape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Quantity Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
RoadCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Water Surface Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
More Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Check-out/Return License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

6 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring and Updating Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . 170
About Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Eagle Point Menu Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Table of Contents v
vi Eagle Point Menu
INTRODUCTION
The Eagle Point Menu is an organizational tool as well as a product
containing tools that are used across Eagle Point products. It is used to
CHAPTER
help manage your projects, specify the settings for your project, open
Eagle Point products and receive on-line help for commands within the
software.
The menus on the Eagle Point Menu are explained on the next page. For
more information on the Eagle Point Menu, refer to the Getting Started
manual.

1
Eagle Point Menu runs on AutoCAD, BricsCad, and MicroStation.

Figure 1-1 Eagle Point Menu

Chapter 1: Introduction 1
 The File menu allows you to manage your projects. You can create new projects or subprojects and
open and delete projects. Informational properties about the project, such as details, history, manifest
and client information are also provided to you. Customization for printouts can also be found in this
menu.
Units, formats, precision, CAD settings, and plot scales for the project can be set using the System
menu. All of this information can then be created into a prototype to be used for subsequent projects.
You can set which Node (Field Code) Library is used when symbols are placed into the CAD graphic. If
an external database is desired for your survey points, it can also be set in the System menu.
The Tools menu contains commands that increase your productivity when working the CAD graphics.
You can group layers/levels together and then change their states all at one time. There are several
other commands, such as listing the layer/level of an object, isolating a layer/level and setting a layer/
level to be current. Also, you can capture the current state of the CAD graphic file and restore it to that
state at a later time.
You can access all of the Eagle Point products from the Products menu. You can customize what
products appear in the menu and specify in which order they appear.
The Help menu provides help on every command, along with on-line documentation. The Help
command also provides, if applicable, a picture of the dialog box, definitions for each control on the
dialog box, QuickSteps on how to run the command and concepts about the command. The on-line
documentation is the complete documentation of all of the Eagle Point products.

2 Eagle Point Menu

FILE
The File menu provides access to commands that help you manage your
project. You can create new projects, sub-projects and additional CAD
CHAPTER
graphic files, and open, rename, copy and delete any part of a project.
You can also view properties of the project, customize printer settings and
exit the software.
In this chapter:
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 2: File 3
Concepts
This section explains Eagle Point projects, additional drawing/design files, and Intelligent Indexing.

Eagle Point Project

An Eagle Point project consists of at least one plan CAD graphic file. You may have more than one plan
CAD graphic file that is used by different Eagle Point products. The project may contain a CAD graphic
file of a subdivision, a roadway alignment, an interchange, etc. You can have up to 1000 plan CAD
graphic files per project.

Eagle Point Sub-project

An Eagle Point sub-project is an Eagle Point project that is divided into smaller pieces. The Eagle Point
products that can create a sub-project are RoadCalc™, Sanitary Sewers and Storm Sewers.
For RoadCalc™, each sub-project is one centerline horizontal alignment. You can have 999
RoadCalc™ sub-projects per project.
For Sanitary Sewers, each sub-project is a sanitary sewer network. You can have 99 Sanitary Sewers
sub-projects per project.
For Storm Sewers, each sub-project is a storm sewer network. You can have 99 Storm Sewers sub-
projects per project.
For Water Surface Profiling, each sub-project is one stream alignment. You can have 999 Water
Surface Profiling sub-projects per project.

Eagle Point Additional Drawing/Design File

An Eagle Point Additional Drawing/Design File is a CAD graphic file that has been added to a project.
This is not the first CAD graphic file that was added to the project. The first CAD graphic file that is
added to a project (at the creation time of the project) is the project CAD graphic file. Any additional
CAD graphic files can be used by the products that do not create sub-projects. For the products that
use sub-projects, they can use any one CAD graphic file to place “plan” objects into (either the project
CAD graphic file or the additional CAD graphic file associated with it).

Eagle Point Intelligent Indexing

Eagle Point’s Intelligent Indexing allows the software to keep track of all of the data files that are
associated with a project or sub-project. This prevents you from having to remember the names of the
files that were created.

4 Eagle Point Menu

New
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! NEW

KEY-IN COMMAND: newproj

ICON:
The New command allows you to add in a new project, sub-project or additional plan CAD graphic file.

Chapter 2: File
This is a procedural command that utilizes a wizard to walk you through the required steps to create a
project, sub-project or additional plan CAD graphic file. The types of sub-projects that display depend
on the products you have authorized. The appropriate box displays when you click on Next according to
which item is selected in the list box.

Figure 2-1 New Dialog Box

New Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Eagle Point Select this option if you want to create a new Eagle Point project.
Project
For more information, see Eagle Point Project on page 4.
Additional Select this option if you want to add an additional CAD graphic file to an Eagle Point project.
Drawing/Design
For more information, see New Additional Drawing/Design File on page 8.
File
RoadCalc™ Select this option if you want to create a new RoadCalc™ Sub-project. Each roadway project that you
Sub-project want to create for the project is a separate RoadCalc™ sub-project.
For more information see New Sub-project on page 9.
Sanitary Sewers Select this option if you want to create a new Sanitary Sewers Sub-project. Each sanitary sewer network
Sub-project that you want to create for the project is a separate Sanitary Sewers sub-project.
For more information see New Sub-project on page 9.
Storm Sewers Select this option if you want to create a new Storm Sewers Sub-project. Each storm sewer network that
Sub-project you want to create for the project is a separate Storm Sewers sub-project.
For more information, see New Sub-project on page 9.
Water Surface Select this option if you want to create a new Water Surface Profiling sub-project. Each stream project
Profiling Sub- that you want to create for the project is a separate Water Surface Profiling sub-project.
project
For more information, see New Sub-project on page 9.

Chapter 2: File 5
New Project
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! NEW ! EAG LE POINT PROJECT

Selecting the Eagle Point Project option on the New dialog box (Figure 2-1 on page 5) allows you to
create a new Eagle Point project. When you click on Next, the second page of the New Project wizard
as shown in Figure 2-3 displays. Type a description for the new project and a path and name for the
project’s CAD graphic file. The description and CAD graphic file names must be different for each
project. If the CAD graphic file does not exist, you need to enter a path and name for the prototype
Drawing/Seed File that is used when creating the new project CAD graphic file. You also have to
specify the prototype settings. This sets up the system-wide settings for that project (i.e., units, formats,
precision, plot scales and CAD settings). The default is the prototype that was last selected when a new
project was created. The linear units of feet or meters are displayed so you know what units the project
is created with.
The Advanced button on the New Project dialog box allows you to specify a different location for the
data files and plot files to be placed when they are created. By default, the location for the data files and
plot files are sent to the same location as the project CAD graphic file.
" When you add a new project, always specify a new subdirectory for the project CAD graphic file. In
other words, never try to store two project CAD graphic files in the same subdirectory. Otherwise, some
data files may be lost/overwritten by one project or the other.

Figure 2-2 New Dialog Box

Figure 2-3 New Project Dialog Box

New Project Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Project Type the unique description of the project or click on the Select an Existing Project icon to the
Description right and browse for the desired project.

6 Eagle Point Menu

New Project Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Project Drawing/ Type the path for the CAD graphic file. If the directories you specified do not exist, the program
Design File creates them for you. Be sure to add new projects to their own directory or subdirectory. You
may also click on the Select a drawing icon to the right of the Project Drawing/Design File edit
field to display the Select File dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select an existing CAD
graphic file to use as the plan drawing/design file for this project.
Prototype This allows you to select the prototype to be used for the new project. The prototype setting
Settings contains units, formats, precision, CAD settings, plot scales and layer/level groups.
Linear Units This displays the units of the prototype settings that have been selected in the Prototype
Settings drop list.

Chapter 2: File
Prototype If the project CAD graphic file does not exist, you need to enter a path and name for the
Drawing/Seed Prototype Drawing/Seed File that is used when creating the new project CAD graphic file.
File Select the Select a Prototype icon to the right of the Prototype Drawing edit field to access the
Select Prototype dialog box.
Advanced This allows you to specify a location for the data files and plot files that are different from the
location of the project CAD graphic file.
For more information, see Advanced Project Settings (below).

QuickSteps
To add a new Eagle Point project, complete the following steps:
1. Select File ! New or click on the New icon on the Open dialog box (Figure 2-10 on page 12)
to display the New dialog box (Figure 2-2 on page 6).
2. Highlight Eagle Point Project in the list box and click on Next.
This displays the second page of the New Project dialog box (Figure 2-3 on page 6).
3. Type a description for the project in the Project Description edit field. The description must
be unique.
4. Type the CAD graphic file name in the Project Drawing/Design File Name edit field. Specify
the drive, full path and CAD graphic name.
For example: C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\MY_PROJ.DWG or C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\MY_PROJ.DGN. If
the directories do not exist, the program creates them for you.
5. If the Project CAD graphic file specified does not exist, you need to enter a Prototype
Drawing/Seed File. Type the CAD graphic file name for the prototype/seed file in the
Prototype Drawing/Seed File edit field, or select the Prototype Drawing/Seed File by clicking
on the Folder icon to the right of the edit field.
6. Select your desired prototype settings from the drop list.
This sets all of your project settings such as linear units and precision.
7. Click on the Advanced button if you want to place the data files or plot files into a location
different from the location of the CAD graphic file specified in step 4.
8. Click on Finish to accept the parameters for the new project.
The program displays to the Open dialog box, allowing you to open the project that you just added.

Advanced Project Settings

EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! NEW ! EAG LE POINT PROJECT ! A DVANCED

The Advanced button on the New Project dialog box (Figure 2-3 on page 6) allows you to specify a
location for the data files and plot files that is different from the location of the project CAD graphic file.
This allows you more flexibility if you want to separate your data files from your CAD graphic files.

Chapter 2: File 7
" If you want your data files and plot files located in the same folder as your CAD graphic file, do not
change anything in this dialog box. By default, these paths are set to the same location as the plan CAD
graphic file.

Figure 2-4 Advanced Project Settings Dialog Box

Advanced Project Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Data Files This is the location where the files that Eagle Point generates are placed for the project. By
Location default, this is the same location as the project CAD graphic file. Click on the Folder icon to the
right of the Data Files Location edit field to select the location for the data files to be placed.
Plot Files This is the location where the plot files that Eagle Point generates are placed for the project. By
Location default, this is the same location as the project CAD graphic file. Click on the Folder icon to the
right of the Plot Files Location edit field to select the location for the plot files to be placed.

New Additional Drawing/Design File

EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! NEW ! A DDITIONAL DRAWING /DESIG N FILE

The New Additional Drawing/Design File command allows you to have more than one CAD graphic file
for the project. You can work in any of these CAD graphic files with Eagle Point products. You can have
1000 CAD graphic files per project.

Figure 2-5 New Dialog Box

Figure 2-6 New Additional Drawing/Design File Dialog Box

8 Eagle Point Menu

 New Additional Drawing/Design File Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Project Listing This displays the listing of all the projects that have been created. The project that is highlighted
is the project for which the additional plan CAD graphic file is added.
Additional Enter the location and name of the additional CAD graphic file that you want to add for the
Drawing/Design highlighted project. Click on the Folder icon to the right of the Additional Drawing/Design File
File edit field to select an additional CAD graphic file for the highlighted project.
Prototype If the CAD graphic file does not exist, you need to enter a path and name for the prototype
Drawing/Seed drawing/seed file that is used when creating the new project CAD graphic file. Select the Folder
File icon to the right of the Prototype Drawing/Seed file edit field to select a Prototype Drawing/Seed
File.

Chapter 2: File
QuickSteps
To add an additional CAD graphic file, complete the following steps:
1. Select File ! New or click on the New icon on the Open Project dialog box (Figure 2-10 on
page 12) to display the New dialog box (Figure 2-5 on page 8).
2. Highlight Additional Drawing/Design File in the list box and click on Next.
This displays the second page of the New Additional Drawing/Design File dialog box (Figure 2-6 on
page 8).
3. Highlight the project for which you want to add an additional CAD graphic file.
4. Type the CAD graphic file name in the Additional Drawing/Design File Name edit field.
Specify the drive, full path and drawing/design file name.
For example: C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\ADD_DWG or C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\ADD_DGN.DGN. If the
directories do not exist, the program creates them for you.
5. If the CAD graphic file specified does not exist, you need to enter a Prototype Drawing/Seed
File. Type the CAD graphic file name for the prototype/seed file in the Prototype Drawing/
Seed File edit field, or select the Prototype Drawing/Seed File by clicking on the Folder icon
to the right of the edit field.
6. Click on Finish to accept the parameters for the new additional CAD graphic file.
The program redisplays the Open dialog box, allowing you to open the additional Plan Drawing/
Design File that you just added.

New Sub-project
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! NEW ! S UB-PROJECT

The New Sub-project command allows you to create an additional sub-project for your project. Select
the type of sub-project that you wish to create from the list.

Chapter 2: File 9
" If you want to add a sub-project that has already been worked on (i.e., given to you by another user),
copy the sub-project data files to the project’s Data File location and be sure to enter the sub-project
number corresponding to the data files. The description of the sub-project may be different from what it
was originally.

Figure 2-7 New Dialog Box

Figure 2-8 New Sub-project Dialog Box

New Sub-project Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Project Listing This displays the listing of all of the projects that have been created. The project that is highlighted is the
project for which the sub-project is added.
Sub-project This is the number that is assigned to the sub-project. This number is used to maintain the data files for
Number this sub-project.
Description Type the unique description of the sub-project.
Sub-project Select the prototype you want to create the new sub-project with.
Prototype
For more information refer to the Sub-Project Prototype Settings in the RoadCalc™, Sanitary Sewers,
Storm Sewers, or Water Surface Profiling reference guides.

Figure 2-9 New Sub-project Dialog Box

10 Eagle Point Menu

New Sub-project Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Use Project This option allows you to use any of the project’s CAD graphic files for the sub-project.
Drawing/Design
File
Use New This option allows you to add a new CAD graphic file to be used for the sub-project.
Drawing/Design
File
Additional Enter the location and name of the additional CAD graphic file that you want to add to the
Drawing/Design highlighted project. Click on the Folder icon to the right of the Additional Drawing/Design File
File edit field to select an Additional CAD graphic file for the highlighted project.

Chapter 2: File
Prototype If the CAD graphic file does not exist, you need to enter a path and name for the prototype
Drawing/Seed drawing/seed file that is used when creating the new project CAD graphic file. Select the Folder
File icon to the right of the Prototype Drawing/Seed File edit field to select a prototype drawing/seed
file.

QuickSteps
To add a new sub-project, complete the following steps:
1. Select File ! New or click on the New icon on the Open Project dialog box (Figure 2-10 on
page 12) to display the New dialog box (Figure 2-7 on page 10).
2. Highlight the type of sub-project that you want to create from the list box and click on Next.
This displays the second page of the New Sub-project dialog box (Figure 2-8 on page 10).
3. Type a sub-project number in the sub-project Number edit field.
4. Type a description for the sub-project in the Description edit field. The description must be
unique. Click on Next.
This displays the third page of the New Sub-project dialog box (Figure 2-9 on page 10).
5. Select the Sub-project prototype you want to create the new sub-project with.
6. Select if you want to use a CAD graphic file that has already been added for the project or if
you want to add a new CAD graphic file for the sub-project to use.
If you want to use a CAD graphic file that has already been added for the project, toggle on the Use
Project Drawing/Design File option and highlight the CAD graphic file in the treeview at the top of
the dialog box. If you want to use a new CAD graphic file, toggle on the Use New Drawing/Design
File option and type the CAD graphic name in the Additional Drawing/Design File edit field. Specify
the drive, full path and CAD graphic file name. For example:
C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\MY_PROJ.DWG or C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\MY_PROJ.DGN. If the
directories do not exist, the program creates them for you.
7. If the CAD graphic file specified does not exist, you need to enter a Prototype Drawing/Seed
File. Type the CAD graphic file name for the prototype/seed file in the Prototype Drawing/
Seed File edit field, or select the Prototype Drawing/Seed File by clicking on the Folder icon
to the right of the edit field.
8. Click on Finish to accept the parameters for the new sub-project.
The program redisplays the Open dialog box, allowing you to open the sub-project that you just
added.

Chapter 2: File 11
Open
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! OPEN

KEY-IN COMMAND: openproj

ICON:
The Open command allows you to open a project, additional CAD graphic file or sub-project. You
highlight the item that you want to open and click on OK. This opens the project, additional CAD graphic
file or sub-project and closes the Open dialog box. If you highlight the project description and click on
OK, the appropriate CAD engine loads with the project CAD graphic file if the Launch CAD With Project
toggle is on. Use the Configure CAD Engine command, found in the Eagle Point Administrator
program, to set this toggle. Highlighting the CAD graphic file path and clicking on OK also loads the
appropriate CAD engine with the highlighted drawing/design file. If you opened a sub-project, the menu
and tool bar are opened for the correct product. For example, if you opened a RoadCalc™ sub-project,
the RoadCalc™ menu and tool bar are opened for you.
" You can open a project or sub-project by clicking on OK or by clicking on the preview image.

Figure 2-10 Open Dialog Box

Open Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Project listing This displays all of the projects, sub-projects and additional CAD graphic files that have been
created.
Preview Image This displays a preview of the drawing/design file highlighted. This preview is created using the
Make Preview option.
Create New This allows you to add a new project, additional CAD graphic file or sub-project. This adds it to
Project/Sub- the project listing.
project
For more information, see New on page 5.
Rename Project/ This command allows you to change the description of a project or sub-project.
Sub-project
For more information, see Rename on page 21.

Copy Project/ The Copy command allows you to copy a project or any part of that project to a user-specified
Sub-project location. You can copy the project data files, sub-project data files, graphics files and common
data files that are placed in the Eagle Point SUPPORT folder.
For more information, see Copy on page 22.

12 Eagle Point Menu

 Open Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Delete Project/ This icon allows you to remove a project, sub-project, or additional CAD graphic file from the list.
Sub-project You can also remove the files from the list and the drive.
For more information, see Delete on page 23.
Print Project/ This allows you to print the project, sub-project and additional CAD graphic files that are listed.
Sub-project
Listing
Project This displays information about the project. You can view general details, history about the
Properties project, data file manifest and client information.
For more information, see Project Properties on page 15.

Chapter 2: File
Create Shortcut This allows you to place an icon on your desktop to enter a project or sub-project quickly. This
for Your Project/ also allows you to enter the software and a project or sub-project bypassing the Open dialog
Sub-project box.
For more information, see Create Shortcut (below).
Filter the This icon allows you to reduce the information that is displayed in the project listings. You can
Project/Sub- filter based on a description, CAD graphic file or type of sub-project.
project Listing For more information, see Project Filters on page 14.
About Clicking on this button displays the About Eagle Point dialog box. Information such as version,
installation type, and copyright is displayed.
For more information, see About Eagle Point on page 171.
Make Preview of This icon allows you to create a preview for the preview image to display. A preview can be
Project created for each drawing/design file within a project. Only objects such as lines, arcs, polylines/
complex chains, circles, and blocks/cells are selected. Text is displayed in one font only and
splines, ellipses and multilines are not supported in the preview image.

Create Shortcut
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! OPEN ! CREATE S HORTCUT

ICON:
The Create Shortcut command allows you to create an icon on your desktop to open a project or sub-
project without going through the Open dialog box (Figure 2-10 on page 12).

Figure 2-11 Create Shortcut Dialog Box

Create Shortcut Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Name This is the name of the shortcut for the project, sub-project or CAD graphic file that was highlighted when
the command was selected. The shortcut displays on your desktop.

Chapter 2: File 13
Project Filters
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! OPEN ! FILTER

ICON:
The Project Filters command allows you to reduce the information that is displayed in the project listing.
You can filter based on a description, CAD graphic file or type of sub-project.

Figure 2-12 Project Filters Dialog Box

Project Filters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Description Turn on this toggle and type a project description or use any wild-card. The name of the project or sub-
project is listed based on the criteria set for the filter. For example, to list all of the projects and sub-
projects starting with SUBDIV2, type subdiv2*.
Drawing/Design Turn on this toggle and type in a CAD graphic file name or use any wild-card from which to list any
File Name selected projects or sub-projects.
Sub-project Turn on this toggle and select a sub-project type. The sub-projects of that type display in the Projects and
Sub-projects list box in the Open dialog box (Figure 2-10 on page 12). This allows you to select a sub-
project of the type selected.

QuickSteps
To display a list of some specific projects or sub-projects in the Open dialog box, complete the following
steps:
1. Select File ! Open to display the Open dialog box (Figure 2-10 on page 12).
2. Toggle on the Filters option to the left of the Filters icon.
3. Set the Filter criteria by clicking on the Filters icon.
The Project Filters dialog box (above) displays.
4. In the Description edit field, type a project description or use any wild card.
The name of the project is listed based on the criteria set for the filter. For example, to list all the
projects starting with SUBDIV2, type subdiv2*.
5. In the Drawing/Design File Name edit field, type a CAD graphic file name or use any wild
card from which to list any selected project(s).
6. From the Sub-project drop list, select the type of sub-project that you want to display.
7. Click on OK.

14 Eagle Point Menu

Project Properties
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES

KEY-IN COMMAND: projprop

ICON:
The Project Properties command allows you to view information about a project. You can view general

Chapter 2: File
details, history about a project, the data file manifest and client information.

Figure 2-13 Project Properties Dialog Box

Project Properties Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Details Tab This displays general information about the project that is highlighted, including the location, number of
sub-projects, number of files and who created and last modified the project.
History Tab This displays the name of the person who has worked on the project, how long they have worked on the
project and any comments that they have entered.
Manifest Tab This displays all of the files that have been generated by Eagle Point and the location of those files. It
separates the data files from the graphics files.
Client This allows you to enter information about the client that this project is for, such as company, address,
Information Tab telephone numbers, contacts and notes.
Print This prints the information on the details, history, manifest and client information tab pages.
For more information, see Project Properties Print Options on page 20.

Chapter 2: File 15
Project Properties – Details Tab
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! DETAILS TAB

The Details tab on the Project Properties dialog box (below) displays general information about the
project that is highlighted, including the number of sub-projects and who created and last modified the
project.

Figure 2-14 Project Properties Dialog Box – Details Tab

Project Properties Dialog Box – Details Tab Definitions

Option Function
Project This displays the description of the project.
Description
Location This displays the location of the project CAD graphic file.
Number of sub- This displays the number of sub-projects that have been created for the project that is selected.
projects
Number of Files This displays the total number of files that have been generated for the project that is selected.
Created By This displays the name of the person who created the project and the date and time it was created.
Last Modified By This displays the name of the person who last modified the project and the date and time it was modified.

16 Eagle Point Menu

Project Properties – History Tab
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! H ISTORY TA B

The History Tab on the Project Properties dialog box (below) displays who has worked on the project,
how long they have worked on the project and any comments that they have entered. You can also filter
the list by user so the history list only displays information for a particular user.

Chapter 2: File
Figure 2-15 Project Properties Dialog Box – History Tab

Project Properties Dialog Box – History Tab Definitions

Option Icon Function
User This lists the names of the people who have opened the project.
Date Entered This lists the dates that each user opened the project
Time Entered This lists the time of day that the project was opened.
Time Spent This lists the total time that the user had this project open.
Total Time Spent This displays the total time spent for the users listed. To display the amount of time for a specific
user, toggle on the Use Filters option, click on the Filters Project History by User icon, and
specify the user name.
Comments This is a multiline edit field that allows you to enter notes about what was done in the project.
Use Filters This allows you to filter a list based on the user that was working in the project.
See History Filter on page 18 for more information.

Chapter 2: File 17
 History Filter
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! HISTORY ! FILTER

ICON:
The Filter icon on the History Tab of the Project Properties dialog box (Figure 2-15 on page 17) allows
you to filter the listing of all the users that have worked in the project. This allows you to view
information for a specific user that has worked on the project. This also displays the total time the
specific user has spent on the project.

Figure 2-16 History Filter Dialog Box

History Filter Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
User To view the history for a certain user, enter their user name and click on OK. You may also use wild cards.

Project Properties – Manifest Tab

EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! M ANIFEST TAB

The Manifest Tab on the Project Properties dialog box (Figure 2-17 on page 19) displays all of the files
that have been generated by Eagle Point and the location to those files. It separates the data files from
the CAD graphic files.

18 Eagle Point Menu

 Chapter 2: File
Figure 2-17 Project Properties Dialog Box – Manifest Tab

Project Properties Dialog Box – Manifest Tab Definitions

Option Function
Project Data This displays all of the data files that have been generated by Eagle Point.
Files # Filename: This is the name of the data file that was created.
# Path: This is the path to where the data file is located.
Project Drawing/ This displays all of the CAD graphic files that are associated with the project.
Design Files # Filename: This is the name of the CAD graphic file that is being used in the project.
# Path: This is the path to where the CAD graphic file is located.

Project Properties – Client Information Tab

EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! CLIENT INFORM ATION TA B

The Client Information Tab on the Project Properties dialog box (below) allows you to enter information
about the client, such as company, address, telephone numbers, contacts and notes.

Figure 2-18 Project Properties Dialog Box – Client Information Tab

Chapter 2: File 19
 Project Properties Dialog Box – Client Information Tab Definitions
Option Function
Description This displays the description for the project.
Client This is a multi-line edit field that allows you to enter information about the client for whom this project is
being done.
Telephone This is a multi-line edit field that allows you to enter the client’s telephone numbers.
Contact This is a multi-line edit field that allows you to enter who to contact when there are any questions about the
project.
Location This is a multi-line edit field that allows you to enter the location of the project.
Notes This is a multi-line edit field that allows you to enter general information about the project.

Project Properties Print Options

EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PROPERTIES ! PRINT

The Print command allows you to print the information on the Details, History, Manifest and Client
Information tab pages. You can choose which of these items you want to print by toggling them on.

Figure 2-19 Project Properties Print Options Dialog Box

Project Properties Print Options Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Details Toggle this on if you want to print the information on the Details tab page of the Project Properties dialog
box (Figure 2-14 on page 16).
History Toggle this on if you want to print the information on the History tab page of the Project Properties dialog
box (Figure 2-15 on page 17).
Manifest Toggle this on if you want to print the information on the Manifest tab page of the Project Properties dialog
box (Figure 2-17 on page 19).
Client Toggle this on if you want to print the information on the Client Information tab page of the Project
Information Properties dialog box (Figure 2-18 on page 19).

20 Eagle Point Menu

Rename
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! RENAM E

KEY-IN COMMAND: renameproj

The Rename command allows you to change the description of a project or sub-project. The
description of the project or sub-project that is highlighted is displayed in the Description edit field. Type
the new description for the project or sub-project in the Description edit field.

Chapter 2: File
Figure 2-20 Rename Dialog Box

Rename Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Project and Sub- This displays the current project and all of its sub-projects. The description of the item that is highlighted is
projects listing placed into the Description edit field.
Description This is the description of the highlighted project or sub-project. Enter the new description for the project or
sub-project in this edit field.

Chapter 2: File 21
Copy
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! COPY

KEY-IN COMMAND: copyproj

The Copy command allows you to copy a project or any part of that project to a user-specified location.
You can copy the project data files, sub-project data files, graphics files and common data files that are
placed in the Eagle Point SUPPORT folder.

Figure 2-21 Copy Project / Sub-project Dialog Box

Copy Project / Sub-project Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Copy From This displays all the projects in this list. Highlight the project that you want to copy.
Copy To This allows you to specify the location to copy the selected files to. All files are copied to the
Location same folder that is specified. Click on the Folder icon to the right of the Location edit field to
select a location to which the project or sub-project to be copied.
Status This displays how many files are copied, the space available on your machine and the space
required to copy the selected files.
Product Files This displays a list of the Eagle Point products that have created files for the project or sub-
project that is selected. Highlight one or more products to selectively copy the data files for the
respective products. If data exists for the product, that product appears in the list and is
highlighted; if no data exists, that product does not appear in the list. This also has entries in the
list for the graphics files and support files. This copies the appropriate graphics files and support
folder files for the products that are highlighted.

QuickSteps
To copy an existing project or sub-project, complete the following steps:
1. Select File ! Copy to display the Copy Project dialog box (above).
2. Highlight the project or sub-project to be copied from the list in the Copy From frame.
3. Type the location for the project or sub-project to be copied to. Specify the drive and full
path.
For example: C:\PROJECT\SUBDIV\. If the directories do not exist, the program creates them for
you.

22 Eagle Point Menu

 You may also click on the Folder icon to select the desired folder and then click on OK.
4. Highlight the Eagle Point products from which you want to copy files.
Only the products with available data files are displayed.
5. Highlight any graphics files that you want to copy.
6. Highlight the Support Files option to copy the support file associated with the selected
product.
7. Click on OK.

Chapter 2: File
Delete
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! DELETE

KEY-IN COMMAND: delproj

The Delete command allows you to remove the project, sub-project or additional CAD graphic file from
the list. You can also remove the files from the list and the drive.
$ Deleting a project (when the Remove from Listing and Drive toggle is on) removes all files from
the project. Be sure to copy any files you want to keep to a different location before deleting a
project.

Figure 2-22 Delete Dialog Box

Delete Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Project list This displays all of the project, sub-projects and additional CAD graphic files that have been
created.
Use Filters This allows you to reduce the information that is displayed in the project listings. You can filter
based on a description, CAD graphic file or type of sub-project.
For more information, see Project Filters on page 14.
Remove from This option does not delete any data or CAD graphic files but removes the project from the
project listing listing in the Open dialog box. This is the default option.
Remove from This option deletes all the data files for the project, as well as removes the project from the listing
listing and drive in the Open dialog box.

Chapter 2: File 23
QuickSteps
To delete an existing project, sub-project or additional CAD graphic file, complete the following steps:
1. Select File ! Delete to display the Delete dialog box (Figure 2-22 on page 23).
2. Highlight the project, sub-project or additional CAD graphic file from the project listing.
3. Select the option for deleting the item from the project listing or from the project listing and
the drive.
4. Click on Apply.

Print Setup
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! PRINT SETUP

KEY-IN COMMAND: prntsets

The Print Setup command allows you to customize how you want your printouts formatted. You can
specify if you want the printout to be sent to a printer or file, if you want page headers, command
headers, how many lines are printed per page, width to the left margin and how many columns are
printed.
The page header shows the project and user names, printout title, command names, page number,
date and time. The command header shows information about the command that generated the
printout.
Many commands in Eagle Point give the option to send data to a printer or redirect the printed output
to an ASCII file. The printer that is used would be the default printer that is set for your operating
system. The printed output can also be sent to an ASCII file instead of a printer. The program puts into
the file exactly what it would have printed to the
printer – including headers. You can then bring the resulting file into a word processor or spreadsheet
for further manipulation.
Choosing the File option requires a file name to be entered. Be sure to include the path of the file. Type
the name or click on the Folder icon to the right of the File edit field to select a file.
The Font button allows you to select a specific font and point size for your reports that print directly to
your printer. Click on the Font button to display the Font dialog box. Select your font from the list of fixed
width fonts and specify the desired point size. After selecting your options click on OK. Remember to
increase the number of printed columns on the Print Setup dialog box if you wish to see more columns
or specify larger columns widths in your reports.
All of these settings are written to the Current User Registry allowing each user to have his or her own
print settings.

Figure 2-23 Print Setup Dialog Box

24 Eagle Point Menu

 Print Setup Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Printer Toggle on this option to print to a printer. The printer that is used is the default system printer
defined by the operating system.
File Toggle on this option to print to an ASCII file instead of a printer. Type a file name to print to or
click on the Select File icon to select a file.

Page Header Print header information on all pages or only on the first page. Choose not to print any headers
by setting the drop list to none.
Command The command name can also be printed in the header block. Choose to print on all pages, on
Header the first page only or not to print any headers by setting the drop list to none.

Chapter 2: File
Printed Lines Type the number of lines to be printed on each page. The default value is 54.
per Page
Number of Specify the number of characters (columns) each line is to be indented from the left margin. The
Columns for Left default value is zero.
Margin
Printed Columns Type the number of columns to be printed in each line. The default value is 76.
Font Use this button to select a font and point size when printing reports directly to your Windows
system printer. Only fixed width fonts may be selected from the Fonts dialog box. The selected
font and point size are shown next to the Font button.

Exit
EAG LE POINT ! FILE ! EXIT

KEY-IN COMMAND: egptexit

The Exit command allows you to close Eagle Point. This does not close the CAD program that is open,
but closes all of the Eagle Point products that are open. This allows you to continue to work in CAD
without having Eagle Point open.

Chapter 2: File 25
26 Eagle Point Menu
SYSTEM
The System menu provides access to commands that control the settings
for the project. You can set the units, formats, precision and CAD settings.
CHAPTER
These settings can then be made into a prototype for future projects. You
can also find the External Node Database and update Node information
commands.
In this chapter:
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Default CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3
Prototype Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Node (Field Code) Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Update Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
EGPT Command Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Products Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dynamic Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dialogs on Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Embedded CAD Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 3: System 27
Concepts
This section explains Nodes, the External Node Database, duplicate Nodes and point protection.

MicroStation V8 Considerations

Cell Library and Design File Considerations

Eagle Point allows you to use your V7 cell libraries and seed files as a starting point when working in
Microstation V8. Eagle Point ensures that the MicroStation V8 cell libraries and seed files the software
uses are kept separate from the MicroStation V7 files that you may already have. When a Microstation
V7 (SE or J) cell library is selected in Microstation V8, Eagle Point does the following:
1. If the cell library is V7, Eagle Point creates a V8 subdirectory under \\egpt\images.
2. The V7 cell library is copied to the \\egpt\images\V8 directory.
3. Eagle Point converts the V7 cell library in the \\egpt\images\V8 folder to a V8 cell library.
4. The V8 cell library in the \\egpt\images\V8 folder is attached to the design file.
When a Microstation V7 (SE or J) seed file is selected in Microstation V8, Eagle Point does the
following:
1. If the seed file is a V7 design file, Eagle Point creates a V8 subdirectory under
\\egpt\support\dgn.
2. The V7 seed file is copied to the \\egpt\support\V8 directory.
3. Eagle Point converts the V7 seed file in the \\egpt\support\dgn\V8 folder to a V8 design
file.
4. The V8 seed file in the \\egpt\support\dgn\V8 folder is copied to the project location as
the prototype.
If the cell libraries are already V8 cell libraries, Eagle Point does not create new subdirectories under
\\egpt\images. Eagle Point just attaches the cell libraries to the design file. If the seed files are already
V8 design files, Eagle Point just uses the seed files and copies the design files to the project location.
" If you are running with Eagle Point in Microstation SE or J and attempt to attach a V8 cell library or use
a V8 seed file, Eagle Point will display an error message stating that it cannot attach the cell library or
seed file due to it being an invalid version.

$ You cannot save V8 cell libraries back to version 7.

Design History
The Design History feature in MicroStation V8 allows you to roll back to earlier versions of the graphic
elements in the design file. Use of Design History with Eagle Point is NOT SUPPORTED. The design
history will NOT store earlier versions of the data stored in the Eagle Point data files. Because of this
limitation, design history will be disabled when Eagle Point is running with MicroStation V8. To disable
the Design History feature, user configurations variables are set in the user configuration files. The
following lines are added to the EGPT.ucf file that is used when running Eagle Point:
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY =CREATE=0
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY <COMMIT=0
The CREATE variable does not allow you to create a new design history if you haven’t already started
one in the design file. The COMMIT variable does not allow you to save to design history.

28 Eagle Point Menu

Interaction with Models
For the majority of commands, Eagle Point interacts with the current or active model within a design file.
This means when placing or selecting elements, Eagle Point only “sees” the active model. The
commands that don’t behave this way deal with drawing alignments, profiles, and sewers.
An alignment is written to the active model the first time it is created. The model name is stored with the
alignment, so any time the alignment is redrawn it is redrawn in the same model. RoadCalc profiles are
written to the active model the first time a profile is created. Storm Sewers and Sanitary Sewers
networks are also written to the active model the first time the network is created. The model name is
stored with the network, so any time the network is redrawn, it is redrawn in the same model. The
alignments, profiles, and sewers behave differently mainly so plan and profile sheets attach the correct
models for the reference files.

Level Locking
The new feature in MicroStation V8 that allows you to lock levels is supported within Eagle Point. Eagle
Point does not place any objects onto a level that is locked. When Eagle Point attempts to place objects
onto a locked level, a message box displays stating how many objects failed to be placed because of
the locked level. Objects that already reside on a locked level can’t be modified or deleted. Objects that

Chapter 3: System
are on locked levels can be selected so calculations and reports can be performed. For example, an
alignment can be placed on a level and then locked so it can’t be modified or deleted, but can be used
for reporting stations and offsets. Likewise, Nodes on locked levels can be selected to draw lines
between or inversed between.

Accusnap
Eagle Point supports the use of Accusnap in MicroStation V8. Accusnap allows you to snap to objects
without having to select a tentative snap. It also allows you to delete objects without doing a select and
accept. The Accusnap feature is available in all commands that allow a select object or multiple select
object. Some examples of where this would occur include the annotation commands in Drafting, the
select pipe and annotate pipe commands in Profiles, the selection commands in Landscape Design
and the Convert Objects to Reach command in Storm Sewers and Sanitary Sewers.

Save as V7 Considerations
When you are using Eagle Point in MicroStation V8, Eagle Point is working in the native V8 design file
format. Eagle Point does not support running in the V7 or DWG workmodes in MicroStation V8. On
occasion you may be required to take your project back to an Eagle Point version that runs on
MicroStation SE or J. In order to do so, there are some things that have to be considered when trying to
take a project back to this earlier version of the software.
# The cell libraries in MicroStation V8 are NOT supported in MicroStation SE/J. You cannot convert a
V8 cell library to a V7 cell library. You need to have backup version 7 cell libraries.
# In order to take the Eagle Point project in MicroStation V8 back to Eagle Point running in
MicroStation V7 you need to be running Eagle Point version 4.1.0 or greater. If the design file in
MicroStation V8 has multiple models in it, each of the models will be saved back to individual
design files (dgn’s) when saved back to version 7. Because of this graphic elements (RoadCalc
profiles, Storm Sewers and Sanitary Sewers networks) are placed in individual design files and
lose their connectivity to the data. The profile data and storm/sanitary sewer data would have to be
redrawn in the version 7 design files. You need to add each of the design files as Additional Design
Files in Eagle Point in order to place information into the design files. Another option is to add each
design file as a separate project.
# Eagle Point reads the CAD settings differently in MicroStation SE/J versus in MicroStation V8. All of
the Eagle Point CAD settings in MicroStation V8 are stored in files with .csm extensions. The Eagle
Point CAD settings in MicroStation SE/J are stored in files with a .csu extension. Because of this,

Chapter 3: System 29
 CAD settings changes in Eagle Point working with MicroStation V8 are not used when Eagle Point
is running in MicroStation SE and J and vice versa.
" Tip: You are strongly urged to not use the model feature in MicroStation V8 if you anticipate saving the
design file back to MicroStation SE/J.

Nodes
A Node can contain various items. A Node can be a symbol (block or cell) or a data point and attributes.
It can also be a symbol (block or cell) and attributes, or just a point and attributes.
The symbol is a block in AutoCAD/BricsCad and a cell in MicroStation. This symbol is specified in the
Node (Field Code) Library. Each Node has its own symbol. A Node cannot have more that one symbol
attached to it. An additional symbol can be attached to a Node so two symbols are displayed. The
additional symbol is not part of the Node, so modifications to the Node do not modify the additional
symbol.
The data point is a three-dimensional point that is placed at the insertion point of the block in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the cell origin of the cell in MicroStation. This allows you to snap to these objects easier.
The attributes are text that is attached to the symbol. The attributes that are available to set are Node
ID, Description, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Station/Offset, Station and Offset.

AutoCAD/BricsCad
If you explode the Node, the attributes disappear. Only the Symbol and data point remain. The object is
no longer considered a Node.

MicroStation
If you drop the complex status of the Node, the attributes remain as text. The object is no longer
considered a Node.

External Node Database

The External Node Database is an option on the System menu. The database file is in a Microsoft
FoxPro database format but is encrypted by Eagle Point to prevent corruption by the user.
The intended goal for this feature is to allow point information to be shared intelligently among multiple
users in multiple projects.
When linked to an external database, Node information may be read from and written to an external
Node database, as well as to the CAD graphic file. Settings control the precedence of searches, and
the synchronization between the CAD graphic file and the database while running the software.
The external database can be linked as a project database or a drawing database. When linked as a
project database, all Nodes within the project plan drawing or project additional drawings are placed
into the same database. When linked as a drawing database, each drawing file within a project can use
its own database. This allows you to have smaller database files for the Nodes.
You may choose to lock records within the database. Locked database records are not modifiable by
anyone, including the user who locked them. Locked records cannot be overwritten. They must be
explicitly unlocked before they can be modified. However, all users are able to read locked records in
the database.
Records are locked by inserting the user name inside a field in the appropriate database records,
allowing others to determine who locked the records.
If you are writing Node information to the database, locked Nodes cannot be modified in the database.
If the toggle to lock Nodes in the CAD graphic file is selected, Nodes that are locked in the database
cannot be modified in the CAD graphic file.

30 Eagle Point Menu

 A toggle on the Lock Nodes tab page controls whether Nodes, which are locked in a database, are to
be locked from modification within the CAD graphic file as well.
Detecting the lock status of a Node number takes a higher precedence than detecting when a Node ID
has already been used. Commands which prompt you for a new Node ID (i.e., the Node ID to be used
for a new Node to be created by that command) check first to see if that Node is locked in the database.
Record locking is only an option. Users may write to any database records which are not locked, and
which are not in reserved Node ranges.
In addition to locking existing records in the database, you may reserve ranges of Node IDs in advance,
preventing other users from attempting to write the same Node IDs into the database. Reserved Node
ranges are stored in a companion file, sharing the same name as the database file, but with the
extension DBR. Whenever Nodes are written to the database (by any user), the DBR file is checked to
ensure that no other user has reserved that Node ID.
A toggle on the Reserve Nodes tab page controls whether Nodes, which are reserved in a database,
are to be reserved in the CAD graphic file. Reserving Nodes is only an option. You may create or
modify any Node that lies in a range that is not reserved or locked.
Since the External Node Database is only an option, it is possible for you to work without an external file
that stores your Nodes. Furthermore, you may activate an external database for existing projects, as
well as new projects, whether or not they were created with this release of an Eagle Point product. It is

Chapter 3: System
also possible to disassociate an external Node database from a project.
Since multiple projects can access the same Node database, the database defaults to the location of
your project. The database is not required to be placed in the same location as your project data files.
The full path and name to the Node database is stored in the Project Settings.

Point Protection
The Point Protection dialog box (below) displays when you attempt to place a Node ID that already
exists into the project and if you have toggled on Point Protection in the Nodes Format option in the
Formats command found in the Eagle Point System menu. All Eagle Point products that can place
Nodes use this Point Protection dialog when a duplicate Node ID is going to be placed into the project.
Point Protection informs you which Node ID is being duplicated and offers different choices for how to
handle the duplicate placement. The five options are Use New Node ID, Delete Old Node, Do Not Place
Node, Place Duplicate Node ID and Disable Point Protection. The Apply All toggle is available to
bypass future duplicate Node warnings that would appear while running the current command.

Figure 3-1 Point Protection Dialog Box

Point Protection Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Use New Node Set Point Protection to this option if you want to use a different Node ID in place of the Node ID you
ID originally entered in your command. Selecting this option enables the New Node ID to Place edit field so
you may enter the new Node ID of the Node to place.
Delete Old Node Setting Point Protection to this option deletes the original Node with the same Node ID you are trying to
place. The Apply All toggle enables so that you may easily overwrite a series of Node IDs that may be
duplicated by the current command.
Do Not Place The Do Not Place Node option does not place the new Node that shares an existing Node ID into the
Node project.

Chapter 3: System 31
 Point Protection Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Place Duplicate This option places another instance of the same Node ID that Point Protection found as duplicated. This
Node ID results in multiple instances of the same Node ID in the project. The Apply All toggle is available if you
want to place a series of duplicate Node IDs into the project. You may use the Resolve Duplicate Nodes
command in COGO to later resolve the duplications. When the duplicate Nodes are later selected in
another command you are presented with the Duplicate Nodes dialog box (below) to select which instance
of the Node you would like to use.
Refer to Duplicate Nodes (below) for more information.
Disable Point This sets the Point Protection toggle off in the Nodes Format command for the entire project. When Point
Protection Protection is disabled, Eagle Point does not warn you with the Point Protection dialog box when you
attempt to place duplicate Node IDs into the project. This results in duplicate Node IDs existing within the
project.
New Node ID to This edit field allows you to establish the Node ID of the Node to place.
Place
Apply All This allows you to easily overwrite a series of Node IDs that may be duplicated by the current command.

Duplicate Nodes
The Duplicate Nodes dialog box (below) is displayed when duplicate Node IDs exist in the project and
you attempt to use one of the duplicate Node IDs. Each instance of the duplicate Node ID is displayed
in a list that reports the coordinate information (Northing, Easting, elevation), description, layer/level,
block/cell name and Field Code to assist you in determining which instance of the Node you would like
to use. Highlight the Node instance and select OK. Selecting Cancel results in no Node instance being
selected and you are returned to the current command without a Node selected.
Use the Resolve Duplicate Nodes command found in COGO to eliminate multiple instances of the
same Node ID.

Figure 3-2 Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box

Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Node ID This column displays the Node ID value.
Northing This column displays the Northing, or Y coordinate.
Easting This column displays the Easting, or X coordinate.
Elevation This column displays the elevation, or Z coordinate.
Description This column displays the description values.
Layer/Level This column displays the layer/level of each Node.
Symbol This column displays the block/cell of each Node.
Field Code This column displays the Field Code of each Node.

32 Eagle Point Menu

Units
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! UNITS

KEY-IN COMMAND: projunit

The Units command allows you to set input and output for various items. You can set input for angular,
degree of curve and planimetric area. You can set output for angular, degree of curve, and planimetric
area. You can also set the degree of curvature length.
" Units can be created into a prototype to be used in a new project. Also included in a prototype are
Formats, Precision, Drawing/Design File Settings, CAD Settings and Layer/Level Groups.

For more information, see Prototype Settings on page 48.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-3 Units Dialog Box

Units Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Category This displays what type of units you are setting input, output or length for.
Input This controls how you input data for the active category.
Output This controls how the data for the specified category is displayed on dialog boxes or printouts.

Angular Units
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UNITS ! A NG ULAR

Angular Units allow you to set the input and the output for angles. You can choose from decimal
degrees; degrees, minutes, seconds; gradians; mils and radians.
" When entering horizontal directions or angles by degrees, minutes and seconds, use a period (.) to
separate degrees from minutes. Do not use another delimiter to separate minutes from seconds.

Figure 3-4 Units – Angular Dialog Box

Units – Angular Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Input This determines how you enter an angle into an edit field. You can change this at any time.

Chapter 3: System 33
 Units – Angular Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Output This determines how an angle is reported to you in a dialog box or printout. You can change this at any
time.
Decimal This option displays the angular units in decimal degrees format (359.9999).
Degrees
Degrees, This option displays angular units in degrees, minutes, seconds format (359.5959).
Minutes,
Seconds
Gradians This option displays the angular units in gradian format. There are 400 gradians per circle.
Mils This option displays the angular units in mils format. There are 6400 mils per circle.

This option displays the angular units in radians format. There are 2 π radians per circle.
Radians

Degree of Curvature Units

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! UNITS ! DEG REE OF CURVATURE

Degree of Curvature Units allow you to specify whether you are creating and reporting curves based
from an arc definition or a chord definition. They also allow you to enter the length of arc or chord from
which to base the calculations.

Figure 3-5 Units – Degree of Curvature Dialog Box

Units – Degree of Curvature Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Input/Output This determines how you enter a degree of curvature value into an edit field and how a degree of
curvature value is reported to you in a dialog box or printout. You can change this at any time.
# Arc Definition: Select this option to use the Arc definition for degree of curvature. Set the arc
length for any degree of curvature measurement in the Length field.
# Chord Definition: Select this option to use the Chord definition for degree of curvature. Set the
chord length for any degree of curvature measurement in the Length field. This option is
typically used for rail projects.
Length This allows you to enter the length of an arc or chord to base the calculations from. You can change this at
any time.

34 Eagle Point Menu

Linear Units
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UNITS ! LINEAR

The Linear Unit is the unit for the project. The input is static text stating what units this project is in. This
cannot be changed after a project is created. This is set by the Prototype Settings when you create a
project. The output is also set to the same units as the input.

Figure 3-6 Units – Linear Dialog Box

Units – Linear Dialog Box Definitions

Chapter 3: System
Option Function
Input This determines how you enter linear distance into an edit field. You cannot change this once a project
has been created.
Output This determines how a linear distance is reported to you in a dialog box or printout.
Mixed Units Click on this button to display the Mixed Linear Input Units dialog box. This option allows you to enter
distance values into edit controls that are not the same units as the project. For example, you can enter an
English distance (feet) into a metric project.
See Mixed Linear Input Units (below) for more information.

Mixed Linear Input Units

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UNITS ! LINEAR ! M IXED UNITS

The Mixed Linear Input Units command allows you to enter values into edit fields requiring linear
distances that are not the same units as the project. The Multiplication Factor allows you to enter the
value to multiply the distance value entered to covert it to a distance in the same units as the project.
The Unit Indicator allows you to customize the text that is placed after a distance of mixed units. The
Unit Indicator must immediately follow a numeric value. When it does, the distance entered is converted
to a linear distance defined by the project units. For example, if you enter '100m' into a distance edit
field when in an English project, the value will be converted to 328.083989501, assuming the
Multiplication Factor to convert from meters to feet is 3.28083989501 and the Unit Indicator for meters
is 'm'. If a Unit Indicator is not entered in the distance edit field, the distance value entered is in terms of

Chapter 3: System 35
 the project units (feet when in an English project or meters when in a metric project) unless otherwise
noted after the edit field.

Figure 3-7 Mixed Linear Input Units Dialog Box

Mixed Linear Input Units Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Current Project This displays the current units of the project. This will display feet when in an English project or meters if
Units you are in a metric project.
Alternate Unit The Alternate Unit Input displays what linear values can be converted from, what the conversion factor is,
Input and what each unit indicator is.
Convert From This column displays all of the linear values that can be converted from to obtain a value that is in the
project units. You can convert from Feet, U.S. Survey Foot, Meters, Millimeters, Chains, User-Defined,
Architectural Feet, and Architectural Inch.
Multiplication This displays the multiplication factor applied to distance entered to convert from one unit to another.
Factor
Unit Indicator This allows you to customize the text that is placed after a distance of mixed units.
Example # Distance: Enter a linear distance followed by the Unit Indicator and click on Convert. The
converted value will be displayed.
# Convert: This allows you to do a sample conversion to verify the multiplication factor is correct
when converting from one unit to another.

Planimetric Area Units

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UNITS ! PLANIM ETRIC A REA

The Planimetric Area Units command allows you to set the input and output for areas. You can choose
between square feet and acres in an Imperial project and square meters and hectares in a metric
project.

Figure 3-8 Units – Planimetric Area Dialog Box

36 Eagle Point Menu

 Units – Planimetric Area Dialog Box Definitions
Options Function
Input This determines how you enter a planimetric area into an edit field. You can change this at any time.
Output This determines how a planimetric area is reported to you in a dialog box or printout. You can change this
at any time.
Square Feet When this option is set in the input or output field, area units are entered or displayed in square feet. This
is only available when you are in an English project.
Acres When this option is set in the input or output field, the area units are entered or displayed in acres. This is
only available when you are in an English project.
Square Meters When this option is set in the input or output field, the area units are entered or displayed in square meters.
This is only available when you are in a Metric project.
Hectares When this option is set in the input or output field, the area units are entered or displayed in hectares. This
is only available when you are in a Metric project.

Formats

Chapter 3: System
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! FORM ATS

KEY-IN COMMAND: projfrmt

The Formats command allows you to set entry and display formats for horizontal directions, Nodes and
stationing.
" Formats can be created into a prototype to be used in a new project. Also included in a prototype are
Project Units, Precision, Plot Scales, CAD Settings and Layer/Level Groups.
For more information, see Prototype Settings on page 48.

Figure 3-9 Formats Dialog Box

Formats Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Category This displays the type of formats for which you are setting entry and display.
Format This allows you to select the format for which you are setting entry and display.

Chapter 3: System 37
Horizontal Direction Formats
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! FORM ATS ! HORIZONTAL DIRECTION

The Horizontal Direction format allows you to set the entry and display for horizontal directions. You can
choose between Geometric, North Azimuth, South Azimuth and Bearing.

Figure 3-10 Formats – Horizontal Direction Dialog Box

Formats – Horizontal Direction Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Geometric Select this option to set the format of the angle to have a geometric format.
North Azimuth Select this option to set the format of the angle to measure from the North and rotate clockwise.
South Azimuth Select this option to set the format of the angle to measure from the South and rotate clockwise.
Bearing Select this option to set the format of the angle to have a bearing format.

Bearings
Bearing direction, as shown below, is broken down into four types of bearings: North East, South East,
South West and North West.
A North East bearing measures clockwise from due North and is reported as “N<value>E” in a report
dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you may type ne<value> regardless of
what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type *1<value> to signify a North East
bearing.

Figure 3-11 North East Bearing

A South East bearing, as shown below, measures counterclockwise from due South and is reported as
“S<value>E” in a report dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you may type
se<value> regardless of what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type *2<value> to
signify a South East bearing.

Figure 3-12 South East Bearing

38 Eagle Point Menu

A South West bearing, as shown below, measures clockwise from due South and is reported as
“S<value>W” in a report dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you may type
sw<value> regardless of what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type *3<value> to
signify a South West bearing.

Figure 3-13 South West Bearing

A North West bearing, as shown below, measures counterclockwise from due North and is reported as
“N<value>W” in a report dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you may type
nw<value> regardless of what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type *4<value> to
signify a North West bearing.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-14 North West Bearing

Azimuths
Azimuths can be broken down into two types: North Azimuth and South Azimuth.
A North Azimuth (below) measures clockwise from due North and is reported as “NAZ<value>” in a
report dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you may type naz<value>
regardless of what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type *5<value> to signify a
North Azimuth.

Figure 3-15 North Azimuth

A South Azimuth, as shown in Figure 3-16 on page 40, measures clockwise from due South and is
reported as “SAZ<value>” in a report dialog box. When entering a direction in a direction edit field, you

Chapter 3: System 39
 may type saz<value> regardless of what the Direction Type drop list may read. You may also type
*6<value> to signify a South Azimuth.

Figure 3-16 South Azimuth

Geometric
A geometric direction is based off the Cartesian coordinate system. The direction measures
counterclockwise from due East. A geometric direction is only reported as “<value>” with no label in the
edit field.

Figure 3-17 Geometric Direction

Nodes Formats
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! FORM ATS ! NODES

The Nodes Format allows you to select whether you would like your Node IDs to be numeric only or
alphanumeric. It also allows you to use point protection so you do not create any Nodes with duplicate
ID values.
For more information, see Point Protection on page 31.
" Once you have placed a Node that is alphanumeric, you cannot switch the Node ID format to numeric.
You can however, switch from numeric only to alphanumeric at any time.

Figure 3-18 Formats – Nodes Dialog Box

40 Eagle Point Menu

 Formats – Nodes Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
ID Format This allows you to specify if you want your Node IDs to be numeric only or alphanumeric. If you have
placed alphanumeric Nodes, you cannot change to numeric only Nodes.
Point Protection This allows you to prevent any Node IDs from being duplicated in your CAD graphic file or External Node
Database.

Stationing Formats
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! FORM ATS ! STATIONING

The Stationing Format allows you to set the entry and display for stationing. You can choose between
No +, +0, +00, +000, +0000, and International 20 Meter.
" Station values can be entered with or without the + symbol in any location that requests a station value
to be input.

" International 20 Meter stationing is that one full station equals 20 meters. Therefore, 1+ 00 is the same

Chapter 3: System
as 20 meters; 2 + 65 is the same as 105 meters (two full stations of 20 meters plus 65 meters).

Figure 3-19 Formats – Stationing Dialog Box

Formats – Stationing Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Format This allows you to set the entry and display for stationing. You can choose between No +, +0, +00, +000,
+0000, and International 20 Meter. This can be changed at any time.

Precision
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PRECISION

KEY-IN COMMAND: projprec

The Precision Command allows you set the precision for angular, linear, planimetric area, stations,
offsets, dry volume and wet volume.
" Precision can be created into a prototype to be used in a new project. Also included in a prototype are
Units, Formats, Drawing/Design File Settings, CAD Settings and Layer/Level Groups.

Chapter 3: System 41
 See Prototype Settings on page 48.

Figure 3-20 Precision Dialog Box

Precision Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Category This displays what type of Precision you are setting for display.

Angular Precision
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! PRECISION ! A NG ULAR

The Angular Precision command allows you to set how you want angles reported to you. If you have
your Angular Units set to Decimal, Gradians, Mils or Radians for output, the program uses the precision
set for Decimal. If you have your Angular Units set to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for output, the
program uses the precision set for Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.

Figure 3-21 Precision – Angular Dialog Box

Precision – Angular Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Decimal This is used as the precision if your Angular Units are set to Decimal, Gradians, Mils or Radians for output.
Degrees, This is used as the precision if your Angular Units are set to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for Output.
Minutes,
Seconds

42 Eagle Point Menu

Linear Precision
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! PRECISION ! LINEAR

The Linear Precision command allows you to set how you want distances, Northings, Eastings and
elevations to be reported to you. This is also used when coordinates are annotated in the CAD graphic
file. This excludes the placement of Nodes because they have their own coordinate precision.

Figure 3-22 Precision – Linear Dialog Box

Chapter 3: System
Precision – Linear Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Distance This is used as the precision for any length that is reported.
Northing/ This is used as the precision for any northing and easting coordinates that are reported. This is also used
Easting when coordinates are annotated in the CAD graphic file. This excludes the placement of Nodes because
they have their own northing and easting precision.
Elevation This is used as the precision for any elevation coordinate that is reported. This is also used when
elevations are annotated in the CAD graphic file. This excludes the placement of Nodes because they
have their own elevation precision.

Planimetric Area Precision

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PRECISION ! PLANIM ETRIC A REA

The Planimetric Area Precision command allows you to set how you want planimetric areas reported to
you. If the project is an Imperial project, you can set the precision for square feet and acres. If your
project is a metric project, you can set the precision for square meters and hectares. If you have your
Planimetric Area units set to Square Feet or Square Meters for output, the program uses the precision
set for square feet or square meters. If you have your Planimetric Area units set to Acres or Hectares
for output, the program uses the precision set for acres or hectares.

Figure 3-23 Precision – Planimetric Area Dialog Box

Chapter 3: System 43
 Precision – Planimetric Area Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Square Feet This is used as the precision if your Planimetric Area units are set to Square Feet or Square Meters for
(Square Meters) output.
Acres (Hectares) This is used as the precision if your Planimetric Area units are set to Acres or Hectares for output.

Dry Volume Precision

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PRECISION ! DRY VOLUM E

The Dry Volume Precision command allows you to set how you want dry volumes to be reported to you.
If you are in an Imperial project, you are able to set the precision for cubic feet, cubic yards and gallons.
If you are in a metric project, you are able to set the precision for cubic meters and liters.

Figure 3-24 Precision – Dry Volume Dialog Box

Precision – Dry Volume Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Cubic Feet This is used as the precision if your Dry Volume is reported in Cubic Feet or Cubic Meters.
(Cubic Meters)
Cubic Yards This is used as the precision if your Dry Volume is reported in Cubic Yards.
(NA)
Gallons (Liters) This is used as the precision if your Dry Volume is reported in Gallons or Liters. This precision setting is
only to be used if you have installed the Eagle Point LANDCADD™ software.

Wet Volume Precision

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! PRECISION ! W ET VOLUM E

The Wet Volume Precision command allows you to set how you want wet volumes to be reported to
you. If you are in an Imperial project, you are able to set the precision for cubic feet, gallons and acre-
feet. If you are in a metric project, you are able to set the precision for cubic meters, liters and hectare –

44 Eagle Point Menu

 meters. You may set the precision by typing values in the edit boxes or dragging slider bars to the
desired values.

Figure 3-25 Precision – Wet Volume Dialog Box

Precision – Wet Volume Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Cubic Feet This is used as the precision if your wet volume is reported in cubic meters or cubic feet.
(Cubic Meters)
Gallons (Liters) This is used as the precision if your wet volume is reported in gallons or liters for output. This precision
setting is only used if you have installed the Eagle Point LANDCADD™ software.

Chapter 3: System
Acre-Feet This is used as the precision if your wet volume is reported in acre-feet or hectare-meters.
(Hectare-Meters)

Station/Offset Precision
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PRECISION ! STATION/OFFSET

The Station/Offset Precision command allows you to set how you want stations and offsets to be
reported to you and when they are annotated in the CAD graphic file. This excludes the placement of
Nodes, because they have their own station and offset precision. You may set the precision by typing
values in the edit boxes or dragging slider bars to the desired values.

Figure 3-26 Precision – Station/Offset Dialog Box

Precision – Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station This is used as the precision for any stations that are reported. This is also used when stations are
annotated in the CAD graphic file. This excludes the placement of Nodes, because they have their own
station precision.
Offset This is used as the precision for any offsets that are reported. This is also used when offsets are annotated
in the CAD graphic file. This excludes the placement of Nodes, because they have their own offset
precision.

Chapter 3: System 45
Default CAD Settings
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! DEFAULT CAD SETTING S

KEY-IN COMMAND: projcad

ICON:
The Default CAD Settings command allows you to set the default CAD settings for the majority of the
objects that are constructed. There is a tree view on the left of the dialog box that divides all of the
objects that are constructed in CAD by product. The CAD settings appear on the right of the area for the
item that is highlighted in the tree view.
" When changing any of the highlighted item’s attributes, be sure to click on Apply before highlighting
another item in the tree view.

" These can be created into a prototype to be used in a new project. Also included in a prototype are
Units, Formats, Precision, Drawing/Design File Settings and Layer/Level Groups.

See Prototype Settings on page 48.

AutoCAD/BricsCad
AutoCAD/BricsCad contain the following settings: layer, color, linetype, width, override with active
attributes, text units, plotted size/height, drawing scale, style and use styles height.

MicroStation
MicroStation contains the following settings: level, color, linestyle, custom linestyle, weight, override
with active attributes, text units, plotted size/height, design file scale, font and use font’s height.

Figure 3-27 Default CAD Settings – AutoCAD/BricsCad Dialog Box

Default CAD Settings – AutoCAD/BricsCad Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Tree view This lists all of the objects that are constructed in CAD, separated by product.
Global Modify This allows you to change the text size for all items that place text. It also changes the CAD
settings to use the active attributes if Override with Active Attributes is toggled on.
Layer This is the layer on which the object is constructed. You can type the layer name or click on the
Select Layer icon to select an existing layer.
For more information, see Select Layer on page 48.

46 Eagle Point Menu

Default CAD Settings – AutoCAD/BricsCad Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Color This is the color that the object is constructed with. You can type the color into the edit field or
click on the Color icon to select a color.

Linetype This is the linetype that the object is constructed with.

Line Width This is the width that is available for any object that creates a polyline when it is constructed.
Override with When this is toggled on, this disables the layer, color, linetype and width. The active symbology
Active Attributes of the CAD is used when the object is constructed.
Option This is the type of text option that is used. You can choose between Leroy, Plotted Inches
(Millimeters), Drawing Units or Points.
Plotted Size/ This is the plotted size of the text if your text units are set to Leroy, Plotted Inches (Millimeters) or
Height Points. This is the height if your text units are set to Drawing Units.
Plot Scale This displays the horizontal scale of the drawing that you have open.
Style This is the text style that is used when text is placed into the drawing.
Use Style’s This uses the height that is set for the text style by the CAD package.
Height

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-28 Default CAD Settings – MicroStation Dialog Box

Default CAD Settings – MicroStation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Tree view This lists all of the objects that are constructed in CAD, separated by product.
Global Modify This allows you to change the text size for all items that place text. It also changes the CAD
settings to use the active attributes if Override with Active Attributes is toggled on.
Level This is the level on which the object is constructed.
Color This is the color with which the object is constructed. You can type the color into the edit field or
click on the Color icon to select a color.

Style This is the line style with which the object is constructed. If this is set to Custom, you must enter
a custom line style to be used.
Custom Style This is only available if you have set the linestyle to be custom. This is the custom linestyle that
is used for the object when it is constructed.
Weight This is the weight that the text or object uses when it is constructed.
Override with When this is toggled on, this disables the level, color, linestyle, custom line style and weight.
Active Attributes The active symbology of the CAD is used when the object is constructed.
Text Unit This is the type of text option that is used. You can choose between Leroy, Plotted Inches
(Millimeters), Drawing Units or Points.
Plotted Size/ This is the plotted size of the text if your text units are set to Leroy, Plotted Inches (Millimeters)
Height or Points. This is height if your text units are set to Drawing Units.
Plot Scale This displays the horizontal scale of the design file that you have open.

Chapter 3: System 47
 Default CAD Settings – MicroStation Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Font This is the text font that is used when text is placed into the design file. The weight is also used
when the text is placed.
Use Font’s This uses the height that is set for the font by the CAD package.
Height

Select Layer
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! DEFAULT CAD SETTING S ! S ELECT FROM A VAILABLE LAYERS

ICON:
The Select Layer command can be used to select an existing layer defined in the CAD graphic rather
than typing the layer name into a layer edit field. The Select Layer dialog box (below) displays the
layers that are already defined in the CAD graphic. Highlight the layer name you want in the list or type
the desired layer name into the layer edit field and select OK. The layer that is selected in this dialog
box is filled into the layer edit field on the CAD settings dialog box from where the Select Layer
command was chosen.

Figure 3-29 Select Layer Dialog Box

Select Layer Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Layers Lists the layers that are already defined in the CAD graphic. Highlight the layer name you want to set the
layer to in the CAD Settings dialog box and click on OK.

Prototype Settings
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! PROTOTYPE S ETTING S

KEY-IN COMMAND: protoset

The Prototype Settings command allows you to create a prototype of a project. This prototype includes
the settings for Units, Formats, Precision, Drawing Settings, CAD Settings and Layer/Level Groups.
This library listing is stored in the file PROTOTYP.LIB file in the SUPPORT folder. The PROTOTYP.LIB
file is the pointer file to the individual prototype settings. You can create up to 999 prototypes.

48 Eagle Point Menu

" When you create a prototype of a project, CAD settings for both AutoCAD/BricsCad and MicroStation
are saved. If the prototype was created in AutoCAD/BricsCad and used the prototype for a MicroStation
project, the CAD settings are Eagle Point defaults. It is recommended that you create separate
prototypes for AutoCAD/BricsCad and MicroStation.

Figure 3-30 Prototype Settings Dialog Box

Prototype Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Listing This lists all of the prototypes that have been created. You are not able to delete the Eagle Point

Chapter 3: System
Default prototypes.
Create New This icon allows you to create a new prototype based off of a project that has been selected.
Prototype
For more information, see New Prototype, below.

Delete Prototype This icon allows you to remove a prototype from the listing. You cannot remove the Eagle Point
Default prototypes from the list.

New Prototype
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! PROTOTYPE S ETTING S ! CREATE NEW PROTOTYPE

ICON:
The New Prototype command allows you to create a prototype based on an existing project. This
prototype can then be used when you create a new project.
When you create a new prototype, the name of the prototype is added to the Prototype Settings dialog
box (above). This is stored in the file PROTOTYP.LIB file in the SUPPORT folder. The PROTOTYP.LIB
file is the pointer file to the individual prototype settings.
When the prototype is created, the project settings (units, formats, precision and plot scales), CAD
settings and layer/level groups from the project data file location are copied. The project settings are
stored in a file called PROJNAME.SET (where PROJNAME is the name of the project’s plan CAD
graphic file). The CAD settings are stored in a file called PROJNAME.CSA (for AutoCAD/BricsCad),
PROJNAME.CSU (for MicroStation SE or J), or PROJNAME.CSM (for MicroStation V8). The
PROJNAME.SET file is copied into PROTO###.SET in the SUPPORT folder (where ### is the number
in the Prototype Settings). The PROJNAME.CS? (where ? is “A” for AutoCAD/BricsCad and “U” for
MicroStation) are copied into the PROTO###.CS? in the SUPPORT folder.

Figure 3-31 New Prototype Dialog Box

Chapter 3: System 49
 New Prototype Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Description This is the description given to the prototype that is created. This is what is displayed in the
Prototype Settings dialog box (Figure 3-30 on page 49).
Project This displays all of the projects that have been created. This is the first level of the tree view that
is displayed in the Open dialog box (Figure 2-10 on page 12).
Prototype This is the drawing/seed file that is saved with the prototype. This is the default drawing/seed file
Drawing that is used when a new project is created using this prototype.

QuickSteps
To create a prototype for a project, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Prototype Settings.
This displays the Prototype Settings dialog box (Figure 3-30 on page 49).
2. Click on the Create New Prototype icon.
The New Prototype dialog box (above) displays.
3. Type a new description for the prototype settings.
4. Select an existing project from which you wish to create a prototype from the drop list.
5. Select a new drawing/design file for the Prototype Drawing/Seed File if you want to change
what is used.
6. Click on OK.
The system saves the information and returns to the Prototype Settings dialog box. The new
description displays. The system copies all of the settings for the prototype to the SUPPORT folder.
When you create a new project and select the prototype, all of the settings are copied to the
location of your new project.
7. Click on Close to close the Prototype Settings dialog box.

Delete Prototype
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PROTOTYPE SETTING S ! DELETE EXISTING PROTOTYPE

ICON:
The Delete Prototype command allows you to remove a prototype from the listing. This deletes the file
from the Prototype Settings and deletes all of the associated files (PROTO###.SET and
PROTO###.CS?) from the SUPPORT folder.
" You cannot remove the Eagle Point Default prototypes from the list.

Node (Field Code) Library

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY

KEY-IN COMMAND: nodelib

50 Eagle Point Menu

 ICON:
Selecting the Node (Field Code) Library command from the System menu opens the Node (Field Code)
Library dialog box (below). A Node is an object used to represent a point in the CAD graphic file. It is a
block or a cell that can contain (in addition to a dot at the point value location) a symbol, point number,
description, elevation, northing and easting, and station and offset.
You can create new Field Code libraries, modify, copy or delete Field Code libraries or import a Field
Code library. You can add new Field Codes or modify, copy or delete existing Field Codes.
$ AutoCAD/BricsCad users, please refer to the What’s Installed section of the Eagle Point Getting
Started manual for information on how to configure the software to use your own folder for the
location of your Node symbol blocks.

You can add new attribute styles or modify or delete existing attribute styles. You can filter your listing of
Field Codes by Field Code, description or attribute style. You can also globally modify Field Codes with
the following options: scale multiplier, attribute style, masking and whether or not to use the symbol’s
layer/level and color when it is placed or to use the active CAD settings.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-32 Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box

Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Current Field This is the library that contains the Field Codes that are displayed in the list. This is a drop list
Code Library that displays all of the Field Code libraries that have been created.
Manage Field This displays the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (Figure 3-33 on page 53), allowing
Code Libraries you to add, modify, copy, delete, import and export Field Code libraries.
For more information about the Field Code Library, see Manage Field Code Libraries on page
53.
Field Code List This displays all of the Field Codes that are contained in the current Field Code Library.
Field Code This is used to place a specific symbol and attributes by selecting it from a drop list or by
entering the Field Code in the data collector. The Field Code cannot be over 10 alphanumeric
characters. Spaces or draw designators are not allowed.
Description This is what is placed in your CAD graphic file next to the symbol the code represents. However,
if a description was entered in the data collector, that description overrides the Field Code’s
description. The description can be up to 100 characters.
Attribute Style This is used to determine what attributes are placed when this Field Code is placed. The
attributes that can by placed with a Node are Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description,
Station and Offset.
Field Code This displays an image of the Field Code that is highlighted in the Field Code list.
Preview
New Field Code This allows you to create a new Field Code for the current Field Code library.
For more information, see New Field Code on page 60.

Chapter 3: System 51
 Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Modify Field This allows you to change any of the parameters of the highlighted Field Code.
Code For more information, see New Field Code on page 60.

Copy Field Code This allows you to duplicate the Field Code that is highlighted by typing a new name.
For more information, see New Field Code on page 60.

Delete Field This allows you to remove the highlighted Field Code from the Field Code library.
Code

Node (Field This allows you to print all of the Field Codes that are contained in the Field Code library.
Code) Library For more information, see Node (Field Code) Library Print Options on page 66.
Print Options
Filter This option allows you to display Field Codes based on their Field Code value, description or
attribute style.

Create Preview This option allows you to create a preview image of the field code symbol to display in the
preview window. To create an image for the preview, click on this icon. You are prompted to
select objects. Graphically select a block/cell. The block/cell is displayed in the preview window
for the highlighted field code.
Attribute Styles This allows you to create new attribute styles or modify, copy or delete existing attribute styles.
For more information, see Attribute Styles Library on page 68.
Global Modify This allows you to change all of your Field Codes with the following options: scale multiplier,
attribute style, masking and whether or not to use the symbol’s layer/level and color when it is
placed.
For more information, see Global Modify on page 79.

QuickSteps (AutoCAD/BricsCad)
Use the following steps to create an image for a field code in the Node (Field Code) Library.
1. Insert the block of the symbol that you want to add to your Field Code in an open project.
2. Add the field code to the Node (Field Code) Library.
3. Highlight the Field Code in the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box and click on the Create
Preview icon.
This is represented by the camera in the lower right corner of the dialog box.
The AutoCAD/BricsCad command line prompts you to select objects.
4. Select the desired block that you want to represent the Field Code for the slide.
5. Repeat these steps for each Field Code Slide.

QuickSteps (MicroStation)
Use the following steps to create an image for a field code in the Node (Field Code) Library.
1. Insert the cell of the symbol that you want to add to your Field Code Library in an open
project.
2. Add the Field Code to the Node (Field Code) Library.
3. Highlight the Field Code in the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box and click on the Create
Preview icon.
This is represented by the camera in the lower right corner of the dialog box.
4. Select the insertion point of the cell that you want to represent the Field Code for the slide.
5. Repeat these steps for each field code.

52 Eagle Point Menu

Manage Field Code Libraries
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! M ANAG E FIELD CODE LIBRARIES

ICON:
The Manage Field Code Libraries icon allows you to display the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog
box (below). This allows you to create a new Field Code library and modify, copy or delete an existing
Field Code library. You can also import and export a Field Code library.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-33 Manage Field Code Libraries Dialog Box

Manage Field Code Libraries Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Description This is the name of the Field Code library. This contains all of the Field Code libraries that have
been added.
New Field Code This icon allows you add a new Field Code library.
Library For more information, see New Field Code Library on page 53.

Modify Field This icon allows you to change any of the parameters of the Field Code library that is
Code Library highlighted.
For more information, see New Field Code Library on page 53.
Copy Field Code This icon allows you to duplicate the highlighted Field Code library by typing a new name.
Library
For more information, see Copy Field Code Library on page 56.

Delete Field This icon allows you to remove the highlighted Field Code library from the Field Code library
Code Library listing. If you want to delete the Field Code library from the listing but keep a copy on your
machine, copy the associated files (*.SYM, *.CEL).
Import This allows you to import an existing Field Code library from an older version of an Eagle Point
product.
For more information, see Import Field Code Library on page 57.
Export Clicking on this button allows you to export the highlighted Field Code Library to an ASCII file.
For more information, see Export Field Code Library on page 59.

New Field Code Library

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! M ANAG E FIELD CODE LIBRARIES
! NEW FIELD CODE LIBRARY

ICON:

Chapter 3: System 53
 The New Field Code Library command allows you to create a new Field Code library that can be used.

AutoCAD/BricsCad
You enter a description for the Field Code library, enter a path and name, or select a Field Code library
and specify if you want to automatically add blocks from a folder.

MicroStation
You enter a description for the Field Code library, enter a path and name, or select a Field Code library,
enter in a cell library or select a cell library and specify if you want to automatically add all of the cells
in the cell library.

Figure 3-34 New Field Code Library (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box

New Field Code Library (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Description This is the name of the Field Code library that is being created.
Field Code This is the path and name of the Field Code library that is being created. The Folder button
Library allows you to select an existing Field Code library from a File Selection dialog box.

Automatically This allows you to add drawing files from a folder automatically. The following default values are
Add Blocks from set for each Field Code added:
Directory
Field Code Block Name
Description Block Name
Scale Multiplier 1.0000
Layer Block Name
Color Bylayer
Placement Symbol and Point
Attribute Style Set to the Node attribute style that is
highlighted
Masking Include
Q.T.O Item Number Off
Place Symbol Additional
Symbol Off
Symbol Block Name
Symbol Multiplier 1.0
Layer Block Name
Color Bylayer
Place Using Symbol’s Level
and Color On
Use Field Code as line name in
Data Collection Off

QuickSteps
To add a new Field Code library, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Codes) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).

54 Eagle Point Menu

2. Click on the Manage Field Code Libraries icon next to the Current Field Code Library drop
list to display the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (Figure 3-33 on page 53).
3. Click on the New Field Code Library icon to display the New Field Code Library dialog box
(Figure 3-34 on page 54).
4. Type a description of the library in the Description edit field. This must be a unique
description to be displayed in the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box.
5. In the Field Code Library edit field, type the name of the new library to add to the Field Code
Library, or click on the Folder icon to choose an existing Field Code library using the File
Select dialog box.
6. If you want to automatically load the blocks from a folder, toggle on the Automatically Add
Blocks from Directory option.
7. Click on OK to create the Field Code Library.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-35 New Field Code Library (MicroStation) Dialog Box

New Field Code Library (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Description This is the name of the Field Code library that is being created.
Field Code This is the path and name of the Field Code library that is being created. The Folder icon allows
Library you to select an existing Field Code library from a File Selection dialog box.

Cell Library This is the path and name of the cell library that is being used for the symbols. The Folder icon
allows you to select an existing cell library from a File Selection dialog box.

Automatically This adds all of the cells in the cell library to the Field Code library. The following default values
Add Cells from are set for each Field Code added:
Cell Library
Field Code Cell Name
Description Cell Name
Scale Multiplier 1.0000
Level 1
Color 0 – white
Placement Symbol and Point
Attribute Style Set to the Node attribute style that is highlighted
Masking Include
Q.T.O Item Number Off
Place Additional Symbol Off
Symbol Cell Name
Symbol Multiplier 1.0
Level 1
Color 0 – white
Placing Using Symbol’s
Level and Color On
Use Field Code as the name in
Data Collection Off

Chapter 3: System 55
 QuickSteps
To add a new Field Code library, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Manage Field Code Libraries icon next to the Current Field Code Library drop
list to display the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (Figure 3-33 on page 53).
3. Click on the New Field Code Library icon to display the New Field Code Library dialog box
(Figure 3-35 above).
4. Type a description of the library in the Description edit field. This must be a unique
description to be displayed in the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box.
5. In the Field Code Library edit field, type the name of the new library to add to the Field Code
Library or click on the Folder icon to choose an existing Field Code library using a File
Selection dialog box.
6. In the Cell Library edit field, type the path and name of the cell library that you want to use or
click on the Folder icon to choose an existing cell library using a File Selection dialog box.
7. If you want to automatically load the cells from the cell library, toggle on the Automatically
Add Cells from Cell Library option.
8. Click on OK to create the Field Code library.

Copy Field Code Library

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! M ANAG E FIELD CODE LIBRARIES ! COPY
FIELD CODE LIBRARY

ICON:
The Copy Field Code Library command allows you to duplicate a Field Code library and give it a new
name. You need to provide a description and a Field Code library name.

Figure 3-36 Copy Field Code Library Dialog Box

Copy Field Code Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
From This is the name of the Field Code library that is highlighted in the Field Code library that you are going to
Description copy from.
From Field Code This is the path and name of the Field Code library that you are going to copy.
Library
To Description This is the name of the Field Code library that you are creating.
To Field Code This is the path and name of the Field Code library file that is going to be created from the Field Code
Library library listed in the From section.

56 Eagle Point Menu

QuickSteps
To copy a current Field Code library, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Manage Field Code Libraries icon next to the Current Field Code Library drop
list to display the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (Figure 3-33 on page 53).
3. Highlight the Field Code Library that you want to copy and click on the Copy Field Code
Library icon to display the Copy Field Code Library dialog box (above).
4. Type a description in the To Description edit field. This must be a unique description to be
displayed in the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box.
5. In the Field Code Library edit field, type the name of the new library to add to the Field Code
Library.
6. Click on OK to copy the Field Code library and return to the Manage Field Code Libraries
dialog box.

Import Field Code Library

Chapter 3: System
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! M ANAG E FIELD CODE LIBRARIES ! IM PORT

The Import Field Code Library command allows you to import an existing Field Code library from a
previous release of an Eagle Point product. The versions that you can import are 4.1 MicroStation, 4.2
MicroStation, 5.5 MicroStation, 7.0 Stand-alone, 12.0 AutoCAD, 13.0 AutoCAD, 13.1 AutoCAD, 13.1
ProSurveyor, 13.2 AutoCAD, 14.0 AutoCAD, and an ASCII File.

ASCII File Format

The ASCII File must be in the following format:
Field Code, Description, Symbol, Symbol Multiplier, Layer/Level, Color, Placement (0-2), Attribute Style
Name, Masking (0, 1), Place using symbol’s layer/level and color (0, 1), Use Field Code as Line Name
in Data Collection (0,1), Q.T.O Item ID, Place Additional Symbol (0,1), Additional Symbol, Additional
Symbol Multiplier, Layer/Level, Color.
Placement (0-2):
0 = Symbol and Point
1 = Point
2 = Symbol
Masking (0,1):
0 = Include
1 = Exclude
Place using symbol’s layer/level and color (0,1):
0 = Toggle Off
1 = Toggle On
Use Field Code as Line Name in Data Collection (0,1):
0 = Toggle Off
1 = Toggle On
Place Additional symbol (0,1)

Chapter 3: System 57
 0 = Toggle Off
1 = Toggle On
Example File for AutoCAD/BricsCad:
32, GS, DOT, 1.0, TOPO, 1, 0, Topo Spots, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, CIRCLE, 1.0, SYMBOLS, 256
TREE, 18 in. trunk, DTREE, 1.5, VEGETATION, 3, 0, Vegetation, 1, 1, 0, 02EPS11001, 0,
DTREE, 1.0, VEGETATION, 256

58 Eagle Point Menu

 Example File for MicroStation:
32, GS, DOT, 1.0, 3, 2, 0, Topo Spots, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, CIRCLE, 1.0, 40, 3
TREE, 18 in. trunk, DTREE, 1.5, 4, 4, 0, Vegetation, 1, 1, 0, 02EPS11001, 0, DTREE, 1.0,
41, 4
" The first record in both examples does not have a QTO Item ID specified.

Figure 3-37 Import Field Code Library Dialog Box

Import Field Code Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Version Select the version of the file format that you want to import. You can import Field Code libraries
previous versions of Eagle Point products or an ASCII file.

Chapter 3: System
Description This is the name of the Field Code library that is being created.
Field Code This is the Field Code library or ASCII file name that you want to import. You need to enter the
Library path and name in the Field Code library or ASCII file, or click on the Folder icon to select the file
using a File Selection dialog box.
Cell Library Enter the path and file name of the cell library from which you use cell names.
" This field only displays in MicroStation versions of Eagle Point software.

QuickSteps
To import an existing Field Code library, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Manage Field Code Libraries icon next to the Current Field Code Library drop
list to display the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (Figure 3-33 on page 53).
3. Click on the Import button to display the Import Field Code Library dialog box (above).
4. Select the version of the Field Code library or an ACSII file that you want to import.
5. Type the description for the Field Code library in the Description edit field.
6. Enter a Field Code library or an ASCII file in the File Name edit field for the Field Code library
that you want to import, or click on the Folder icon to display a File Selection dialog box.
7. Click on OK to import the Field Code library and return to the Manage Field Code Libraries
dialog box.

Export Field Code Library

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! M ANAG E FIELD CODE LIBRARIES ! EXPORT

The Export Field Code Library command allows you to export all of the field codes from the highlighted
Node (Field Code) Library on the Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box. The file is exported in an
ASCII format that is the same as the ASCII import format. Exporting a field code library to an ASCII file
allows for easily making mass changes/additions to a field code library in an external editor and then re-
importing the ASCII file back in.

Chapter 3: System 59
 For more information on the format of the file, see Import Field Code Library on page 57.

New Field Code

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! NEW FIELD CODE

ICON:
The New Field Code command allows you to add a new Field Code to the current Field Code library.
The parameters that are required for a new Field Code are the Field Code value, description, node
symbol, symbol multiplier, layer/level, color, placement, attribute style, masking, additional symbol,
additional symbol multiplier, additional symbol layer/level, additional symbol color, place using symbol’s
layer and color and use Field Code as a line name in Data Collection.
The Place Additional Symbol toggle allows you to have the symbology of a Node be separate from the
Node itself. This enables you to have independent layer/level control over the symbols and the Node
point itself. By establishing different layers/levels for the symbols to reside on you can freeze/turn off
the layer/ level that the Node resides on thereby allowing you to see just the symbol. This would also
allow for the Node and its attributes to be removed from the drawing/design file while leaving the
symbol behind. Commands that ask for graphic Node selection still require that you select the Node or
any of its attributes and not the additional symbol. The figure below illustrates what this functionality can
provide.

Figure 3-38 Node with Separate Symbol

60 Eagle Point Menu

 New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad)
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! NEW FIELD CODE

" If the layer name is greater than 22 characters, and you click on OK, AutoCAD’s/BricsCad’s cross-
reference feature and programs such as RoadCalc™ Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers and Water
Surface Profiling that use X-Refs for Plan and Profile sheets may not operate properly.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-39 New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box

New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Field Code This is used to place a specific symbol and attributes by selecting it from a drop list or by
entering the Field Code in the data collector. The Field Code cannot be over 10 alphanumeric
characters. Spaces or draw designators are not allowed.
Description This is what is placed in your drawing next to the symbol the Field Code represents. However, if
a description was entered in the data collector, that description overrides the symbol’s
description. The description can be up to 100 characters.
Node Symbol Specify the block name of the symbol. This is the symbol that has the Node attributes attached
to it. If you are using the Additional Symbol option, generally the Node Symbol should be a block
that is just a point. Be sure the path typed is included in the AutoCAD/BricsCad search path. You
can click on the Folder icon to select the block using a File Selection dialog box.
Symbol Use this as an additional value to multiply to the scale factor of the symbol. The symbol is scaled
Multiplier about its insertion point.
Layer This is the name of the layer you want the symbol to be placed on. The layer name should not
be greater than 22 characters long with no spaces.

Color You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field or
you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field. This allows you to select a
color from the CAD Color Selection dialog box.
Placement Choose between Symbol and Point, Point, or Symbol as the options of how to place your symbol
into the drawing file. Select one of the three options from the drop list.
# Symbol and Point: Places both the block and a point as the Node.
# Point: Places only a point as the Node. The block does not get placed.
# Symbol: Places the block as the Node. This does not place a point at the insertion
point of the block.

Chapter 3: System 61
 New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Attribute Style This is used to determine what attributes are placed when the Node is placed. The attributes
that can be placed with a Node are Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description, Station
and Offset. Click on the Library button to the right of the Attribute Style drop list to display the
Attribute Style Library dialog box.
Masking This allows you to specify how the Node is interpreted if it is used in a surface model. You can
choose between Include or Exclude.
# Include: This includes the Node when it is selected to be used when creating a
surface model.
# Exclude: This excludes the Node when it is selected to be used when creating a
surface model.
Place Additional Toggle this option on to place a symbol that is separate from the Node symbol. When toggled
Symbol on, you must specify the additional symbol that is placed, the symbol multiplier that should be
used for the additional symbol, the layer the symbol should reside on and the color that is used.
Additional Specify the block name of the additional symbol. Be sure the path typed is included in the
Symbol AutoCAD/BricsCad search path. You can click on the Folder icon to select the block using a File
Selection dialog box.
Additional Specify the scale factor for the additional symbol. This is in addition to the scaling that occurs
Symbol due to plot scales. The symbol is scaled about its insertion point.
Multiplier
Additional This is the name of the layer you want the symbol to be placed on. The layer name should not
Symbol Layer be greater than 22 characters long and contain no spaces.

Additional You have two options when to selecting a color. You can either type a color number in the Color
Symbol Color field or you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field. This allows you to
select a color from the CAD Color Selection dialog box.
Place Using Toggle this on if you want the layer and color of the symbol that is specified to be used. If you
Field Code’s want the symbol to be placed on the current layer with the current color, set this toggle to off.
Layer and Color
Use Field Code Toggle this on if you want to process this Field Code as a line name in Data Collection. When
as Line Name in entering Field Codes in the data collector that is using this option, the line name does not need
Data Collection to be entered if it is the same name as the Field Code.
See Reduction Settings in the Data Collection documentation for more information.

QuickSteps
To add a Field Code in AutoCAD/BricsCad, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the New Field Code icon to display the New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) dialog
box (Figure 3-39 on page 61).
3. Type a Field Code name.
This is used to place a specific symbol and its attributes by selecting it from a drop list or by
entering the Field Code in the data collector. The Field Code cannot be over 10 alphanumeric
characters. Spaces or draw designators are not allowed.

62 Eagle Point Menu

4. Type a description.
This is what is placed in your drawing next to the symbol the Field Code represents. However, if a
description was entered in the data collector, that description overrides the symbol’s description.
The description can be up to 100 characters.
5. For the Node Symbol, type the block name.
This is the symbol that has the Node attributes attached to it. If you are using the Additional Symbol
option, generally the Node Symbol should be a block that is just a point. Be sure the path typed is
included in the AutoCAD/BricsCad search path. You can also click on the Folder icon to select the
block using a File Selection dialog box.
6. Set the Scale Multiplier as an additional value to multiply to the scale factor for the symbol.
7. Enter the name of the layer you want the symbol to be placed on.
If the layer name is greater than 22 characters and you click on OK, AutoCAD’s/BricsCad’s cross-
reference feature and programs such as RoadCalc™, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers and
Water Surface Profiling that use X-Refs for Plan and Profile sheets may not operate appropriately.
For other restrictions for layer names, see AutoCAD’s Command Reference manual.
8. You have two options to select a color. You can enter a color number in the Color field or

Chapter 3: System
you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field.
This allows you to select a color from the AutoCAD/BricsCad Color Selection dialog box.
9. Choose between Symbol and Point, Point, or Symbol for the placement of the symbol into
the drawing file.
10. Choose one of the Attribute Styles from the drop list.
This determines what attributes are placed and how they are placed.
11. Set the Masking to either Include or Exclude.
Depending on your selection, the symbol is included or excluded from the surface model creation.
12. Toggle on the Place Additional Symbol option if you want to have a second block placed at
the Node location. Specify the name of the additional block, the symbol multiplier, the layer
it should reside on and the color with which it is placed.
13. Click on OK.

Chapter 3: System 63
 New Field Code (MicroStation)
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! NEW FIELD CODE

Figure 3-40 New Field Code (MicroStation) Dialog Box

New Field Code (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Field Code This is used to place a specific symbol and attributes by selecting the Field Code from a drop list
or by entering the Field Code in the data collector. The Field Code cannot be over 10
alphanumeric characters. Spaces or draw designators are not allowed.
Description This is what is placed in your design file next to the symbol the Field Code represents. However,
if a description was entered in the data collector, that description overrides the symbol’s
description. The description can be up to 100 characters.
Node Symbol Select a cell name from the drop list. This drop list contains all of the cells that are in the cell
library that was selected for the current Field Code Library. This is the symbol that has the Node
attributes attached to it. If you are using the Additional Symbol option, generally the Node
symbol should be a cell that is just a point.
Symbol Use this as an additional value to multiply to the scale factor of the symbol. The symbol is
Multiplier scaled about its insertion point.
Level This is the number of the level that you want the symbol to be placed on. The level can be
between 1 and 63. In MicroStation V8, this is the level name.
Color You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field or
you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field. This allows you to select a
color from the MicroStation Color Selection dialog box.
Placement Choose between Symbol and Point, Point Only or Symbol Only to place your symbol into the
design file. Select one of the three options from the drop list.
# Symbol and Point: Place both the cell and the point as the Node.
# Point: Places only a point as the Node. The cell does not get placed.
# Symbol: Places the cell as the Node. This does not place a point at the cell origin.
Attribute Style This is used to determine what attributes are placed when the Node is placed. The attributes
that can be placed with a Node are Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description, Station
and Offset. Click on the Library button to the right of the Attribute Style drop list to display the
Attribute Style Library dialog box.

64 Eagle Point Menu

New Field Code (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Masking This allows you to specify how the Node is interpreted if it is used in a surface model. You can
choose between Include or Exclude.
# Include: This includes the Node when it is selected to be used when creating a
surface model.
# Exclude: This excludes the Node when it is selected to be used when creating a
surface model.
Additional Select a cell name from the drop list. This drop list contains all of the cells that are in the cell
Symbol library that was selected for the current Field Code Library.
Additional Specify the scale factor for the additional symbol. This is in addition to the scaling that occurs
Symbol due to plot scales. The symbol is scaled about its insertion point.
Multiplier
Additional This is the number of the level that you want the symbol to be placed on. The level can be
Symbol Level between 1 and 63. In MicroStation V8, this is the level name.
Additional You have a choice of two options when selecting a color. You can either type a color number in
Symbol Color the Color field or you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field. This
allows you to select a color from the Microstation Color Selection dialog box.
Place Using Toggle this on if you want the level and color of the symbol that is specified to be used. If you

Chapter 3: System
Field Code’s want the symbol to be placed on the active level with the current color, turn this toggle off.
Level and Color
Use Field Code Toggle this on if you want to process this Field Code as a line name in Data Collection. When
as Line Name in entering Field Codes in the data collector that are using this option, the line name does not need
Data Collection to be entered if it is the same name as the Field Code.
See Reduction Settings in Data Collection for more information.

QuickSteps
To add a Field Code in MicroStation, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the New Field Code icon to display the New Field Code dialog box (Figure 3-40 on
page 64).
3. Type in a Field Code name.
This is used to place a specific symbol and its attributes by selecting it from a drop list, or by
entering the Field Code in the data collector. The Field Code cannot be over 10 alphanumeric
characters. Spaces or draw designators are not allowed.
4. Type in a description.
This is what is placed in your design file next to the symbol the Field Code represents. However, if
a description was entered in the data collector, that description overrides the symbol’s description.
The description can be up to 100 characters.
5. For the Symbol, select a cell name from the drop list.
This drop list contains all of the cells that are in the cell library that was selected for the current Field
Code library. This is the symbol that has the Node attributes attached to it. If you are using the
Additional Symbol option, generally the Node symbol should be a block that is just a point.
6. Set the Symbol Multiplier as an additional value to multiply to the scale factor for the
symbol.
7. For the Level, type the level that you want the symbol to be placed on.
The level can be between 1 and 63. If you are in MicroStation V8, enter the level name.

Chapter 3: System 65
 8. You have two options to select a color. You can enter a color number in the Color field or
you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field.
This allows you to select a color from the MicroStation Color Selection dialog box.
9. Choose between Symbol and Point, Point, or Symbol for the placement of the symbol into
the design file.
10. Choose one of the Attribute Styles from the drop list.
This determines what attributes are placed and how they are placed.
11. Set the Masking to Include or Exclude.
Depending on your selection, the symbol is included or excluded from the surface model creation.
12. Toggle on the Place Additional Symbol option if you want to have a second cell placed at the
node location. Specify the name of the additional cell, the symbol multiplier, the level it
should reside on and the color with which it is placed.
13. Click on OK.

Node (Field Code) Library Print Options

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY PRINT OPTIONS

ICON:
The Node (Field Code) Library Print Options command allows you to print information about all of the
Field Codes in the current Field Code library. You can print the Field Code, Description, Symbol,
Symbol Multiplier, Layer/Level, Color, Placement, Attribute Style, Masking, Q.T.O. Item ID, Use Field
Code Layer/Color and Use Field Code as line name in Data Collection. You can also set the lengths of
each of these columns and the heading for each column.

Figure 3-41 Node (Field Code) Library Print Options Dialog Box

Node (Field Code) Library Print Options Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Data to Print This column displays all of the items that are available to be printed.
Print This column displays if the item listed in the Data to Print column is printed. If there is a check mark in this
field, the item is printed.
Width This column displays how many columns are reserved for the item listed in the Data to Print column.
Column Header This column displays the heading that is printed for each of the items listed in the Data to Print column.
Order This column displays the order (from left to right) that the items listed in the Data to Print column are
printed in. The lowest number is farthest to the left and the highest number is farthest to the right.

66 Eagle Point Menu

 Node (Field Code) Library Print Options Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Total Printed This displays the total of all of the numbers that are displayed in the Width column for the items that are
Columns Used toggled on to be printed.
Total Printed This displays the total number of columns that are available to be printed as set by the printer.
Columns
Available
Save Settings This allows you to save the Node (Field Code) Library Print Options as the default so the next time this
As Default command is selected, the print options are set to what they were when the Save As Default toggle was on.

Node (Field Code) Library Filters

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY FILTERS

ICON:
The Node (Field Code) Library Filter option allows you to list the Field Codes selectively. Click on the

Chapter 3: System
Node (Field Code) Library Filters icon on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box (Figure 3-32 on
page 51) to display the Node (Field Code) Library Filters dialog box, shown below. The options that are
available to be set are Field Code, Description and Attribute Style. Set the options in this box to list the
Field Codes based on specified criteria.
" The Field Code list is only filtered if the Filter option is toggled on. If the Filter option is on, the Field
Code list is filtered based on the options that are toggled on in the Node (Field Code) Library Filters
dialog box. If the Field Code in the list does not meet all of the specified criteria, it is not displayed in the
Field Code list.

Figure 3-42 Node (Field Code) Library Filters Dialog Box

Node (Field Code) Library Filters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Field Code Type in a wild card character for Field Codes to be listed. For example, to list all Field Codes for 60-69,
type 6* in the Field Codes field.
Description Type in a description that you want to filter by. Wild cards are allowed. For example, to list all of the Field
Codes that have a description that starts with tree, type in tree*.
Attribute Style Specify the attribute style that you want to filter by.

QuickSteps
To set filters for the Field Codes, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Node (Field Code) Library Filters icon in the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box to display the Node (Field Code) Library Filters dialog box (above).

Chapter 3: System 67
 3. Toggle on the Field Code option if you want to filter the Field Code list based on the Field
Code. In the edit field, type a wild card character for the Field Codes to be listed.
For example, to list all Field Codes for 60-69, type 6* in the Field Codes field.
4. Toggle on the Description option if you want to filter the Field Code list based on the
description. In the edit field, type a description that you want to filter by. Wild cards are
allowed.
For example, to list all of the Field Codes that have a description that starts with tree, type tree*.
5. Toggle on the Attribute Style option if you want to filter the Field Code list based on the
attribute style. In the drop list, select the attribute style that you want to filter by.
6. Click on OK to save the filter list. If the Filter option is not toggled on, toggle on the Filter
option to filter the Field Code list.

Attribute Styles Library

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE S TYLES

The Attribute Styles Library command displays all of the Attribute Styles that have been created in the
system. The attribute style defines what attributes are placed when a Field Code is placed. The
attributes that can be placed with a symbol are Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description,
Station and Offset.

Figure 3-43 Attribute Styles Library Dialog Box

Attribute Styles Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Attribute Styles This is the listing of all of the attribute styles that have been created in the system.
Attribute Style This displays what the Node would appear like when it is placed in the CAD graphic file using
Preview the attribute style that is highlighted.
New Attribute This icon allows you to create a new attribute style that can be used for a Field Code. This
Style allows you to specify what you want placed when a Field Code uses this attribute style. You can
specify if you want the Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description, Station and Offset to
display and their relationship about the insertion point of the symbol.
For more information, see New Attribute Style on page 69.
Modify Attribute This icon allows you to change any of the parameters for the attribute style that is highlighted.
Style You can change how you want the Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description, Station
and Offset to display and their relationship about the insertion point of the symbol.
For more information, see New Attribute Style on page 69.
Delete Attribute This icon allows you to remove the attribute style from the listing. Highlight the Attribute Style
Style that you want to delete and click on the Delete icon.

68 Eagle Point Menu

New Attribute Style
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE STYLES ! NEW A TTRIBUTE STYLE

ICON:
The New Attribute Style command allows you to create a new attribute style that can be used for a Field
Code. This allows you to specify what you want placed when a Field Code uses this attribute style. You
may specify if you want the Node ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description, Station and Offset to
display and define their relationships to the insertion point of the symbol.

New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad)

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE STYLES ! NEW A TTRIBUTE STYLE

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-44 New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box

New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Name Type a unique description for the attribute style. This is what is displayed in the Attribute Style
Library dialog box. The maximum number of characters for the name is 31.
Attribute This is the list of items that can be place when a Field Code is placed in the drawing file. The
attributes that you can display on a Field Code are Node ID, Description, Northing, Easting,
Elevation, Station-Offset, Station and Offset.
# Node ID: This displays the Node ID of the Field Code when it is placed in the drawing
file. This attribute is always turned on.
# Description: This displays the description of the Field Code when it is placed in the
drawing file.
# Northing: This displays the Northing coordinate value of the Field Code when it is
placed in the drawing file.
# Easting: This displays the Easting coordinate value of the Field Code when it is
placed in the drawing file.
# Elevation: This displays the elevation of the Field Code when it is placed in the
drawing file.
# Sta-Off: This displays station and offset values of the Field Code when it is placed in
the drawing file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset
calculations.
# Station: This displays the station value of the Field Code when it is placed in the
drawing file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset calculations.
# Offset: This displays the offset value of the Field Code when it is placed in the
drawing file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset calculations.

Chapter 3: System 69
 New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Annotate When Annotate is active, the Modify Attribute Item icon is active and the On/Off button displays
Off. When Annotate is not active, the Modify Attribute Item icon is disabled and the On/Off
button displays On. To activate or deactivate the Annotate function, click on the On/Off button.
Layer This displays the layer name on which that attribute is placed.
Color This displays the color that the attribute is placed with in the drawing.
Style This displays the text style that the attribute uses when it is placed in the drawing.
Text Size This specifies the text size in plotted inches or millimeters for the corresponding attribute.
Label This is a prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed in the drawing. For example, for elevation
type EL= <> and the elevation is placed as EL = X, where X in the drawing equals the elevation
of that object.
Justify This is the justification of the attribute, which may be left, right or center. It can also be top left,
top right, top center, bottom right, bottom left, top center, middle right, middle left or middle
center.
Delta X This is the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute in the X direction (in inches or millimeters).
Delta Y This is the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute in the Y direction (in inches or millimeters).
Rotation This is the angle that the attribute would be rotated when the Field Code is placed in the
drawing file. A value of 0 is horizontal (east).
Precision This is the number of significant digits that are placed behind the decimal point that display for
the attribute when it is placed in the drawing file.
Modify Attribute This allows you to change any of the parameters for the attribute that is highlighted. This button
Item is disabled if the attribute highlighted is set to off.

Show Attribute This option displays what the Field Code would look like when it is placed in the drawing file
Styles using the attribute style that is highlighted.
For more information, see Show Attribute Style on page 78.
On/Off This turns the highlighted attribute on or off. If the attribute is off, the Modify Attribute Item icon is
disabled. You cannot modify any of the parameters for the attribute if it is turned off. The name
on this button changes depending on the Attribute item that is highlighted. This is disabled if the
Point Number attribute is highlighted. You cannot turn the Point Number attribute off.

QuickSteps
To add an attribute style in AutoCAD/BricsCad, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Attribute Styles button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display
the Attribute Styles Library dialog box (Figure 3-43 on page 68).
3. Click on the New Attribute Style icon on the Attribute Styles Library dialog box to display
the New Attribute Style dialog box (Figure 3-44 on page 69). The parameters for all of the
attributes are based on the attribute style that is highlighted when you click on the New
Attribute Style icon.
4. Type a unique name for the attribute style in the Name edit field.
5. Turn on or off desired attributes by highlighting the attribute and clicking on the On/Off
button.
This reverses the current state of the attribute. For example, if the Description is currently on and
you click on the Off button, the Description attribute is set to Off. The Off button is changed to read
On.

70 Eagle Point Menu

6. If you want to modify any of the attribute items, click on the Modify Attribute Item icon to
display the Modify Attribute Item dialog box. When you are done making modifications in
the Modify Attribute Item dialog box, click on OK.
7. Click on the Show Attribute Styles icon to view the attributes.
This displays the Show Attribute Style dialog box (Figure 3-49 on page 78).
8. Click on Close to dismiss the Show Attribute Style dialog box and return to the New
Attribute Style dialog box.
9. Click on OK to return to the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.

New Attribute Style (MicroStation)

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE STYLES ! NEW A TTRIBUTE STYLE

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-45 New Attribute Style (MicroStation) Dialog Box

New Attribute Style (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Name Type in a unique description for the attribute style. This is what is displayed in the Attribute Style
Library dialog box. The maximum number of characters for the name is 31.
Attribute This is the list of items that can be placed when a Field Code is placed in the design file. The
attributes that you can display on a Field Code are Node ID, Description, Northing, Easting,
Elevation, Station-Offset, Station and Offset.
# Node ID: This displays the Node ID of the Field Code when it is placed in the design
file. This attribute is always turned on.
# Description: This displays the description of the Field Code when it is placed in the
design file.
# Northing: This displays the Northing coordinate value of the Field Code when it is
placed in the design file.
# Easting: This displays the Easting coordinate value of the Field Code when it is
placed in the design file.
# Elevation: This displays the elevation of the Field Code when it is placed in the
design file.
# Sta-Off: This displays station and offset values of the Field Code when it is placed in
the design file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset calculations.
# Station: This displays the station value of the Field Code when it is placed in the
design file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset calculations.
# Offset: This displays the offset value of the Field Code when it is placed in the design
file. This is only placed with commands that use station/offset calculations.
Annotate When Annotate is active, the Modify Attribute Item icon is active and the On/Off button displays
Off. When Annotate is not active, the Modify Attribute Item icon is disabled and the On/Off
button displays On. To activate or deactivate the Annotate function, click on the On/Off button.

Chapter 3: System 71
 New Attribute Style (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Level This displays the level number on which that attribute is placed. If you are using MicroStation
V8, the level name is displayed.
Color This displays the color that the attribute is placed with into the design file.
Font This is the text font that the attribute uses when it is placed into the design file.
Text Size This specifies the text size in plotted inches or millimeters for the corresponding attribute.
Label This is a prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed in the design file. For example, for elevation
type EL= <> and the elevation are placed as EL = X, where X in the design file equals the
elevation of that object.
Justify This is the justification of the attribute, which may be left, right or center. It can also be top left,
top right, top center, bottom right, bottom left, top center, middle right, middle left or middle
center.
Delta X This is the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute in the X direction (in inches or millimeters).
Delta Y This is the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute in the Y direction (in inches or millimeters).
Rotation This is the angle that the attribute would be rotated when the Field Code is placed in the design
file. A value of 0 is horizontal (east).
Precision This is the number of significant digits that are placed behind the decimal point that display for
the attribute when it is placed in the design file.
Modify Attribute This allows you to change any of the parameters for the attribute that is highlighted. This button
Item is disabled if the attribute highlighted is set to off.

Show Attribute This displays what the Field Code would appear like when it is placed in the design file using the
Styles attribute style that is highlighted.
For more information, see Show Attribute Style on page 78
On/Off This turns the highlighted attribute on or off. If the attribute is off, the Modify Attribute Item icon is
disabled. You cannot modify any of the parameters for the attribute if it is turned off. The name
on this button changes depending on the Attribute item that is highlighted. This is disabled if the
Point Number attribute is highlighted. You cannot turn off the Point Number attribute.

QuickSteps
To add an attribute style in MicroStation, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Attribute Styles button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display
the Attribute Styles Library dialog box (Figure 3-43 on page 68).
3. Click on the New Attribute Style icon on the Attribute Styles Library dialog box to display
the New Attribute Style (MicroStation) dialog box (Figure 3-45 on page 71). The parameters
for all of the attributes are based on the attribute style that is highlighted when you click on
the New Attribute Style icon.
4. Type a unique name for the attribute style in the Name edit field.
5. Turn on or off desired attributes by highlighting the attribute and clicking on the On/Off
button.
This reverses the current state of the attribute. For example, if the Description is currently on and
you click on the Off button, the Description attribute is set to Off. The Off button is changed to read
On.
6. If you want to modify any of the attribute items, click on the Modify Attribute Item icon to
display the Modify Attribute Item dialog box. When you are done making modifications in
the Modify Attribute Item dialog box, click on OK.
7. Click on the Show Attribute Styles icon to view the attributes.

72 Eagle Point Menu

 This displays the Show Attribute Style dialog box (Figure 3-49 on page 78).
8. Click on Close to dismiss the Show Attribute Style dialog box and return you to the New
Attribute Style dialog box.
9. Click on OK to return to the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.

Modify Attribute Item

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE S TYLES
! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE STYLE ! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE ITEM

ICON:

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-46 Modify Attribute Style Dialog Box

Click on the Modify Attribute Item icon in the Modify Attribute Style dialog box to change any of the
parameters for the attribute that is highlighted. This icon is disabled if the highlighted attribute’s
annotation setting is set to Off.

Modify Attribute Item (AutoCAD/BricsCad)

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE S TYLES
! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE STYLE ! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE ITEM

Figure 3-47 Modify Attribute Item (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box

Chapter 3: System 73
 Modify Attribute Item (AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Layer Type in the name that you want the attribute of the Field Code to be placed on when it is placed
in the drawing file. You can also click on the Existing Layers icon to select an existing layer.

Color You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field or
you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field. This allows you to select a
color from the AutoCAD/BricsCad Color Selection dialog box.
Style From the drop list select a text style for the attribute to be displayed. The default text style is
Standard. Make sure that your AutoCAD/BricsCad text style is the same as the attribute text
style.
Text Size Specify the text size of the annotation for the attribute. Enter the size in plotted inches or
millimeters. This value is multiplied by the horizontal plot scale when the attribute is placed into
the project.
Label Type in the prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed for the attribute in the drawing file. For
example, for elevation type EL= <> and the elevation is placed as EL = X in the drawing, where
X equals the elevation of that object.
Justify To select a value, click on the drop list and select the justification for the attribute. The available
options are left, right or center. It can also be top left, top right, top center, bottom, bottom left,
top center, middle right, middle left and middle center.
Delta X Type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute. The distance is in the X direction (in inches or millimeters).
Delta Y Type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute. The distance is in the Y direction (in inches or millimeters).
Rotation Type in a rotation angle if the attribute is to be rotated from the default horizontal value (0.00).
Precision Type a number in the edit field for the significant digits behind the decimal point that displays for
the attribute when the Field Code is placed in the drawing file. You can also use the slider to set
the number of significant digits. For example, 4 would produce 290.5573.

74 Eagle Point Menu

QuickSteps
To modify an attribute item of an attribute style in AutoCAD/BricsCad, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Attribute Styles button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display
the Attribute Styles Library dialog box (Figure 3-43 on page 68).
3. Highlight the attribute style that has some attribute items that you want to modify and click
on the Modify Attribute Style icon on the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.
This displays the Modify Attribute Style dialog box (Figure 3-46 on page 73).
4. If you want to change the name of the attribute style, type a new name in the Name edit field.
5. Turn on or off desired attributes by highlighting the attribute and clicking on the On/Off
button.
This reverses the state that the attribute is currently in. For example, if the Description is currently
on and you click on the Off button, the Description attribute is set to off. The Off button is changed
to read On.

Chapter 3: System
6. Highlight the attribute item that you would like to change the parameters for and click on the
Modify Attribute Item icon to display the Modify Attribute Item dialog box (Figure 3-47 on
page 73).
7. Type in the name of the layer that you want the attribute for the Field Code to be placed on
when it is placed in the drawing, or click on the Layer icon to select an existing layer.
8. You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field
or you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field.
This allows you to select a color from the AutoCAD/BricsCad Color Selection dialog box.
9. For the style, select a text style for the attribute to be displayed as.
The default text style is Standard. Make sure that your AutoCAD/BricsCad text style is the same as
in the attribute text style.
10. Enter the text size in plotted inches or millimeters to control the text height of the attribute
when it is annotated in CAD.
11. For the Label, type in the prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed for the attribute in the
drawing file.
For example, for elevation type EL= <> and the elevation is placed as EL = X in the drawing,
where X equals the elevation of that object.
12. To set the justification, select a justification from the drop list.
13. For Delta X, type the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the
justification point of the attribute. The distance is in the X direction (in inches or
millimeters).
14. For Delta Y, type the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the
justification point of the attribute. The distance is in the Y direction (in inches or
millimeters).
15. For the Rotation, type a rotation angle if the attribute is to be rotated from the default
horizontal value (0.00).
16. For the Precision, type a number in the edit field for the significant digits behind the decimal
point that display for the attribute when the Field Code is placed in the drawing file. You can
also use the slider to set the number of significant digits.
For example, 4 would produce (290.5573).
17. Click on OK when you are done modifying that attribute item.

Chapter 3: System 75
 This returns you to the Modify Attribute Style dialog box.
18. Click on the Show Attribute Style icon to view the attributes.
This displays the Show Attribute Styles dialog box (Figure 3-49 on page 78).
19. Click on Close to dismiss the Show Attribute Style dialog box and return to the Modify
Attribute Style dialog box.
20. Click on OK to return to the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.

Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation)

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE S TYLES
! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE STYLE ! M ODIFY A TTRIBUTE ITEM

Figure 3-48 Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation) Dialog Box

Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation) Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Level Type in the number that you want the attribute for the Field Code to be placed on when it is
placed in the design file. If you are in MicroStation V8, enter the level name.
Color You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field or
you can click on the actual color to the right of the Color Number field. This allows you to select
a color from the MicroStation Color Selection dialog box.
Font From the drop list select a text font for the attribute to be displayed as. The default text style is
Engineering. Make sure that your MicroStation text font is available for the attribute to use.
Text Size Specify the text size of the annotation for the attribute. Enter the size in plotted inches or
millimeters. This value is multiplied by the horizontal plot scale when the attribute is placed into
the project.
Label Type in the prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed for the attribute in the design file. For
example, for elevation type EL= <> and the elevation is placed as EL = X in the design file,
where X equals the elevation of that object.
Justify To select a value, click on the drop list and select the justification for the attribute. The available
options are left, right or center. It can also be top left, top right, top center, bottom right, bottom
left, bottom center, middle right, middle left and middle center.
Delta X Type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute. The distance is in the X direction (in inches or millimeters).
Delta Y Type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to the justification point
of the attribute. The distance is in the Y direction (in inches or millimeters).
Rotation Type in a rotation angle if the attribute is to be rotated from the default horizontal value (0.00).
Precision Type a number in the edit field for the significant digits behind the decimal point that display for
the attribute when the Field Code is placed in the design file. You can also use the slider to set
the number of significant digits. For example, 4 would equal 290.5573.

76 Eagle Point Menu

QuickSteps
To modify an attribute item of an attribute style, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Attribute Styles button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display
the Attribute Styles Library dialog box (Figure 3-43 on page 68).
3. Highlight the attribute style that has some attribute items that you want to modify and click
on the Modify Attribute Style icon on the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.
This displays the Modify Attribute Style dialog box (Figure 3-46 on page 73).
4. If you want to change the name of the attribute style, type a new name in the Name edit field.
5. Turn on or off desired attributes by highlighting the attribute and clicking on the On/Off
button.
This reverses the state that the attribute is currently in. For example, if the Description is currently
on and you click on the Off button, the Description attribute is set to off. The Off button is changed
to read On.

Chapter 3: System
6. Highlight the attribute item that you would like to change the parameters for and click on the
Modify Attribute Item icon to display the Modify Attribute Item dialog box (Figure 3-48 on
page 76).
7. Type in the level number that you want the attribute for the Field Code to be placed on when
it is placed in the design file. If you are in MicroStation V8, enter the level name.
8. You have two options to select a color. You can either type a color number in the Color field
or you can click on the actual color to the right of the color number field.
This allows you to select a color from the MicroStation Color Selection dialog box.
9. For the Font, select a text font for the attribute to be displayed as.
The default text font is Engineering. Make sure that your MicroStation text font is available for the
Node attribute to use.
10. Enter the text size in plotted inches or millimeters to control the text height of the attribute
when it is annotated in CAD.
11. For the Label, type in the prefix or suffix for the value to be displayed for the attribute in the
design file.
For example, for elevation type EL= <> and the elevation is placed as EL = X in the design file,
where X equals the elevation of that object.
12. To set the justification, select a justification from the drop list.
13. For the Delta X, type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to
the justification point of the attribute. The distance is in the X direction (in inches or
millimeters).
14. For the Delta Y, type in the displacement distance from the insertion point of the symbol to
the justification point of the attribute. The distance is in the Y direction (in inches or
millimeters).
15. For the Rotation, type in a rotation angle if the attribute is to be rotated from the default
horizontal value (0.00).
16. For the Precision, type in a number in the edit field for the significant digits behind the
decimal point that display for the attribute when the Field Code is placed in the design file.
You can also use the slider to set the number of significant digits.
For example, 4 would produce (290.5573).

Chapter 3: System 77
 17. Click on OK when you are done modifying that attribute item.
This returns you to the Modify Attribute Style dialog box.
18. Click on the Show Attribute Styles icon to view the attributes.
This displays the Show Attribute Style dialog box (below).
19. Click on Close to dismiss the Show Attribute Style dialog box and return to the Modify
Attribute Style dialog box.
20. Click on OK to return to the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.

Show Attribute Style

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE S TYLES
! NEW OR M ODIFY ! S HOW A TTRIBUTE STYLES

ICON:
The Show Attribute Style command allows you to view the attribute style in relation to the Node. This
allows you to determine if you have the attributes positioned correctly before they are placed into the
CAD graphic file.

Figure 3-49 Show Attribute Style Dialog Box

Show Attribute Style Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Show Attribute This displays the attribute style in relation to the Node. This allows you to determine if you have the
Image attributes positioned correctly before they are placed into the CAD graphic file.

Delete Attribute Style

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! A TTRIBUTE STYLES ! DELETE A TTRIBUTE
STYLE

ICON:
The Delete Attribute Style command allows you to remove the attribute style from the listing in the
Attribute Styles Library. Highlight the style to be removed and click on the Delete icon to remove the
style from the list. Use this to delete any attribute styles from the list box. If any Field Codes in the CAD
graphics or the Node (Field Code) Library are defined with that attribute style, the attribute style cannot
be deleted.

78 Eagle Point Menu

 QuickSteps
To delete an attribute style, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Attribute Styles button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display
the Attribute Styles Library dialog box (Figure 3-43 on page 68).
3. Highlight the attribute style that you want to delete and click on the Delete Attribute Style
icon on the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.
If any Field Codes in the CAD graphic file or the Node (Field Code) Library are defined with that
attribute style, a prompt displays:
This attribute style is currently being used by a Node symbol.
If the Node attribute style is not in use, the Alert dialog box displays, asking if you are sure you want
to delete the attribute style.
4. Click on OK to delete the attribute style.

Chapter 3: System
Global Modify
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! NODE (FIELD CODE)LIBRARY ! G LOBAL M ODIFY

The Global Modify command allows you to modify some of the parameters for all of your Field Codes at
one time. You are able to change the Node Symbol, Symbol Multiplier, Layer/Level, Color, Attribute
Style and Masking. You may also specify whether you want to place an Additional Symbol, Additional
Symbol Multiplier, and whether or not to use the symbol’s layer/level and color when it is placed. This
allows you to quickly change all of your Field Codes instead of having to modify each Field Code
individually.

Figure 3-50 Global Modify Dialog Box

Global Modify Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Modifying Field This displays the name of the current Field Code library that you are modifying the Field Codes
Codes in for.

Chapter 3: System 79
 Global Modify Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Node Symbol Specify the block/cell name for the symbol of the Node. This is the symbol that has the Node
attributes attached to it. If you are using the Additional Symbol option, generally the Node
Symbol should be a block/cell that is just a point.
Symbol Toggle this on if you want to change the scale for all of the symbols. If this is on, the edit field to
Multiplier the right is enabled allowing you to enter a scale factor. Any non-zero positive number is allowed
in this edit field.
Layer/Level Toggle this option on to specify the layer/level on which you want the Node Symbol to be placed.

Color Toggle this option on to specify the color with which you want the Node Symbol to be placed.

Attribute Style Toggle this on if you want to set the attribute style for all of your Field Codes. If this is on, the
drop list to the right is enabled allowing you to select an attribute style. This displays all of the
attribute styles that have been created.
Mask Field Toggle this on if you want to change the masking for all of your Field Codes with a specific
Codes of attribute style. You need to select the attribute style that you want to change the masking for and
Attribute Style select the type of masking that you want to set it to.
# Attribute Style: This drop list displays all of the attribute styles that have been
created.
# Masking: This drop list displays the masking options that you can choose from; either
include or exclude.
Place Additional Toggle this option on to change the status of the Place Additional Symbol toggle. When toggled
Symbol on, the On/Off radio buttons become enable so the option for every field code can be globally
set.
Additional Toggle this option on if you want to change the scale for all of the additional symbols. If this
Symbol option is on, the edit field to the right is enabled, allowing you to enter a scale factor. Any non-
Multiplier zero positive number is allowed in this edit field.
Place Using Toggle this on if you want to change whether the symbol is placed on the layer/level and color
Field Code’s defined for the Field Code, or if it is placed using the current layer/active level and color of the
Layer/Level and CAD. This enables the On and Off radio buttons. If you set this to on, the symbol is placed
Color according to the Field Code’s layer/level and color. If you set this to off, the symbol is placed
using the current layer/active level and color of the CAD.

QuickSteps
To globally modify parameters for all the Field Codes in the current Field Code library, complete the
following steps:
1. Select System ! Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (Figure 3-32 on page 51).
2. Click on the Global Modify button on the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box to display the
Global Modify dialog box (Figure 3-50 on page 79).
3. Set the parameters that you want to modify and click on OK.
This modifies the parameters specified for all of the Field Codes in the current Field Code library
and return you to the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box.

80 Eagle Point Menu

External Node Database
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE

KEY-IN COMMAND: extnode

The External Node Database command allows you to link a database file to your project or each CAD
graphic file within your project that stores your Nodes. You can store your Nodes in the CAD graphic
file, in a database or both. If you want to store your Nodes in the CAD graphic file only, you do not need
to link an external Node database.
" You can have different Nodes in the CAD graphic file than you do in the external Node database. This
allows you to have your control points externally stored so they are not modified accidentally.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-51 External Node Database Dialog Box

External Node Database Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Setup Tab This tab page allows you to link or unlink a database file to be used for Nodes. You can specify the order
that the Nodes are to be read from and where to write the Nodes.
Lock Nodes Tab This tab page allows you to lock and unlock Nodes in the database and CAD graphic file.
Reserve Nodes This tab page allows you to reserve and release Nodes in the database and CAD graphic file.
Tab
Browse This allows you to list Nodes that are in the external Node database. You can list the Nodes by the
Database following options: all, all locked, range of locked, all unlocked, range of unlocked, all reserved and range of
reserved. You also have the ability to export the listed Nodes to an Access database or an Excel
spreadsheet.

External Node Database – Setup Tab

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE ! SETUP TAB

The Setup Tab page on the External Node Database dialog box allows you to link or unlink a database
file to be used for Nodes. The database can be linked as a project database or a drawing database.
When linked as a project database, all Nodes within the project plan drawing or additional drawings are
placed into the same database. When linked as a drawing database, each drawing file within a project

Chapter 3: System 81
 can have its own database. This allows you to have smaller database files for Nodes. It also allows you
to specify the order that the Nodes are to be read from and to where the Nodes are written.

Figure 3-52 External Node Database Dialog Box – Setup Tab

External Node Database Dialog Box – Setup Tab Definitions

Option Function
Current Drawing Turn on this radio button if you want the current open drawing file to use the External Node database
uses Project established for the project. When using this option, all Nodes are placed into the same database file. The
Database same database file can be used for all drawing files contained within the project.
Current Drawing Turn on this radio button if you want the current open drawing file to use its own External Node database.
uses own When using this option every drawing file that is contained within the project can use its own drawing file.
Database This reduces the number of Nodes that are in the database, resulting in faster operations.
Database Name This displays the external Node database that is being used for this project or current CAD graphic file.
Link This allows you to use an external Node database for the project or current CAD graphic file. By default,
the path is the same as the data file location for the project.
Unlink This allows you to detach the external Node database from the project or current CAD graphic file. This
does not delete the database file, it only removes it from being used by the project or current CAD graphic
file.
Compact When data is deleted from an Access database, the Access database can become fragmented and use
disk space inefficiently. Compacting the Access database will make a copy of the file and rearrange how
the file is stored on your disk. Compacting the database will optimize the performance. The database can
only be compacted if you are the only one accessing it.
Since the External Node Database is an Access database, deleting and modifying Nodes linked to the
database can cause the database to become inefficient in performance. If you are linked to an External
Node Database and making frequent changes to the Nodes in your project, you should periodically run the
Compact command. The Compact button will only be available if you are linked to an External Node
Database.
Read Nodes This allows you to specify the order that the Nodes are to be read. The choices that are available include
From Method Graphic Only, Database Only, Graphic then Database, Database then Graphic, and Graphic and
Database, Compare.
Maximum This is only available if Read Nodes From is set to Graphic then Database and Compare. If the Nodes in
Coordinate the CAD graphic file differ from the same Node in the database, you are informed when the Update Node
Difference Information command is selected from the System menu.
Write Nodes To This allows you to specify where to write the Nodes. The choices that are available to write to are Graphic
Method Only, Database Only and Graphic and Database.

82 Eagle Point Menu

Graphic and Database, Compare
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE ! SETUP TAB ! READ NODES FROM M ETHOD
! G RAPHICS AND DATABASE,COM PARE

When the Read Nodes From Method is set to Graphic and Database, Compare in the External Node
Database dialog box (Figure 3-51 on page 81), information for an entered Node ID is searched for in
the CAD graphic and the database. If the Node is present in both and you are using a command that
selects Nodes, the coordinates in both sources are compared. If any coordinate differs by more than
the Maximum Coordinate Difference, the Coordinates for Node ID Differ dialog box (below) displays.
For more information on comparing the external Node database with the CAD graphic file, see the
command help for “Update Node Information.” This explains how to compare the database and the
CAD graphic file and the dialog boxes that display if there are differences between the two.

Chapter 3: System
Figure 3-53 Coordinates for Node ID Differ Dialog Box

Coordinates for Node ID Differ Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Dialog Box This displays the Node ID that differs in the CAD graphic file and database.
Caption
Northing This column displays the Northing coordinate of each Node.
Easting This column displays the Easting coordinate of each Node.
Elevation This column displays the elevation of each Node.
Description This column displays the description of each Node.
Use All DWG/ Clicking on this button tells the system to use the coordinates of the Nodes in the CAD graphic file as
DGN opposed to the coordinates of the Nodes in the database. This option answers all further coordinate
difference questions for the current session.
Use All DB Clicking on this button tells the system to use the coordinates of the Nodes in the database as opposed to
the coordinates of the Nodes in the CAD graphic file. This option answers all further coordinate difference
questions for the current session.
Use DWG/DGN Clicking on this button tells the system to use the coordinates of the Nodes in the CAD graphics as
opposed to the coordinates of the Nodes in the database. This option answers coordinate difference
questions for the current coordinate comparison only.
Use DB Clicking on this button tells the system to use the coordinates of the Nodes in the database as opposed to
the coordinates of the Nodes in the CAD graphic file. This option answers coordinate difference questions
for the current coordinate comparison only.

QuickSteps
In order to link a Node database to a current project, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! External Node Database.
This displays the External Node Database dialog box (Figure 3-51 on page 81).
2. Click on the Setup Tab. Select the Current Drawing uses Project Database option and click
on the Link button.
The Link Database File dialog box displays.

Chapter 3: System 83
 3. Type the new or existing database file name in the File Name field or select it using the
Directories field.
4. Once a valid database file is selected, click on OK.
The database name is displayed as static text next to the Database name.

External Node Database – Lock Nodes Tab

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE ! LOCK NODES TAB

The Lock Nodes tab page on the External Nodes Database allows you to prevent any other users from
modifying Nodes in the database or CAD graphic file. You can display Nodes by the following options to
help you determine which Nodes are locked or unlocked: All, All Locked, All Unlocked, Range of locked
and Range of Unlocked. When you lock some Nodes, another item is added to the drop list. The item is
locked by user name (where user name is your log in name into the Windows operating system).

Figure 3-54 External Nodes Database Dialog Box – Lock Nodes Tab

External Nodes Database Dialog Box – Lock Nodes Tab Definitions

Option Function
Select Nodes by This allows you to display Nodes by the following options to help you determine which Nodes are locked or
unlocked: All, All Locked, All Unlocked, Range of Locked and Range of Unlocked.
Range This is enabled if you have the Select Nodes by option set to Range of Locked or Range of Unlocked.
Enter the Starting Node ID and Ending Node ID that you want to use for the range.
Add to List This appends all of the Nodes that meet the Select Nodes By option to the Node list.
Clear List This removes all of the Nodes in the Node list.
Node ID This displays the ID of the Node that was added to the list.
Northing This displays the Northing coordinate of the Node.
Easting This displays the Easting coordinate of the Node.
Elevation This displays the elevation of the Node.
Description This displays the description of the Node.
Locked By This displays the user name that locked the Node ID.
Lock This allows you to lock all of the records that are highlighted in the Node list. This prevents you from
making any modifications to the Node.
Unlock This allows you to unlock all of the records that are highlighted in the Node list. This allows you to make
any modifications to the Node that you desire.

84 Eagle Point Menu

 External Nodes Database Dialog Box – Lock Nodes Tab Definitions
Option Function
Lock Same Toggle this on to have the Nodes locked in the CAD graphic file as well, as the database. This prevents the
Nodes in Nodes from being modified in either the database or CAD graphic file.
Graphic

QuickSteps
To lock or unlock database records, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! External Node Database.
This displays the External Node Database dialog box (Figure 3-51 on page 81).
2. Select the Lock Nodes Tab from the External Node Database dialog box.
The Lock Nodes tab page (Figure 3-54 on page 84) displays.
3. Set Select Nodes by to the desired option. You can choose from All, All Locked, All
Unlocked, Range of Locked or Range of Unlocked. If required, fill in the range of Node IDs to
display.
4. Click on the Add to List button to fill the Node List with the Node IDs that meet the criteria

Chapter 3: System
specified by the Select Nodes by option.
5. Click on the Lock button if you want to lock the record(s) that are highlighted in the list, or
click on the Unlock button if you want to unlock the record(s) that are highlighted in the list.
If you select records that are locked by another user, the system displays the Confirm Unlock Node
dialog box, stating that another user has locked the records.
" If you want to unlock them anyway, click on OK.

External Node Database – Reserve Nodes Tab

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE ! RESERVE NODES TAB

The Reserve Nodes tab page allows you to prevent any users from using the Node IDs that you have
reserved. You can enter a range of Node IDs that you want to reserve or release.

Figure 3-55 External Node Database Dialog Box – Reserve Nodes Tab

Chapter 3: System 85
 External Node Database Dialog Box – Reserve Nodes Tab Definitions
Option Function
Range This allows you to enter the range of Node IDs that you want to reserve.
Reserve This allows you to reserve the range of Node IDs. This prevents these Nodes from being used.
Reserve Same Toggle this on to have the Nodes reserved in the CAD graphic file as well as the database. This prevents
Nodes in the Nodes from being used in either the database or CAD graphic file.
Graphic
Node ID This displays the ID of the Node.
Reserved By This displays the user name that reserved the Node ID.
Release This allows you to release the records that are highlighted in the Node list.

QuickSteps
To reserve or release Node database records, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! External Node Database.
The External Node Database displays (Figure 3-51 on page 81).
2. Select the Reserve Nodes Tab from the External Node Database dialog box.
The Reserve Nodes tab (Figure 3-55 on page 85) displays.
3. Type in the range of Node IDs that you want to reserve. Click on the Reserve button to
reserve the Nodes in the range specified.
This adds the entry into the Node list.
4. If you want to release a range of Nodes that are reserved, highlight the desired range and
click on the Release button.
If you select records that are reserved by another user, the system displays the Confirm Release
Node dialog box, stating that another user has reserved the records.
" If you want to release them anyway, click on OK.

Browse Database
EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! EXTERNAL NODE DATABASE ! BROWSE

The Browse Database command allows you to display the database contents. This is a read-only
browser. Choose which Nodes you want to display using the Select Nodes by drop list. The options that
you can choose from are All, All Locked, Range of Locked, All Unlocked, Range of Unlocked, All
Reserved and Range of Reserved. Once the Nodes are listed, you can export them to an Access
database or an Excel Spreadsheet.

Figure 3-56 Browse Database Dialog Box

86 Eagle Point Menu

 Browse Database Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Select Nodes By This allows you to choose which Nodes are displayed in the Node List view. The options that you can
choose from are All, All Locked, Range of Locked, All Unlocked, Range of Unlocked, All Reserved and
Range of Reserved.
Range This is enabled if you have Select Nodes by set to Range of Locked, Range of Unlocked or Range of
Reserved. Type the range in the edit fields.
Add to List This appends all of the Nodes that meet the Select Nodes option to the Node list view.
Clear List This removes all of the Nodes in the Node list view.
Export List This button allows you to export the Nodes currently listed to an Access database or an Excel
spreadsheet. To export the listing, click on the Export List button. Specify a path, name, and type of file to
export.
Node ID This displays the ID of the Node.
Northing This displays the Northing coordinate of the Node.
Easting This displays the Easting coordinate of the Node.
Elevation This displays the elevation of the Node.
Description This displays the description of the Node.
Locked By This displays the user name that locked the Node ID.

Chapter 3: System
Reserved By This displays the user name that reserved the Node ID.

QuickSteps
To browse the database, complete the following steps:
1. Select System ! External Node Database.
This displays the External Node Database dialog box (Figure 3-51 on page 81).
2. Select the Browse Database button from the External Node Database dialog box.
The Browse Database dialog box (Figure 3-56 on page 86) displays.
3. From the Select Nodes by drop list, select the appropriate option.
4. Click on the Add to List button to add the Nodes to the Node List.
The Database Record List is updated and you may browse the Nodes. To clear the Nodes in the
Node List view, click on the Clear List button.

Update Node Information

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! UPDATE NODE INFORM ATION

KEY-IN COMMAND: updatenode

The Update Node Information command synchronizes your Node database and your CAD graphic file.
In various situations, when it appears that the Node information in the database and CAD graphic file
may be out of sync due to modifications in either one, or due to changes in the Node database options,
you are prompted to update Node information using the Update Node Information dialog box (Figure 3-
57 on page 88).
The Update Node Information dialog box controls the direction in which the update takes place, which
Node information is applied during the update, the level of confirmation required when adding or
changing Nodes in the target, and whether a report is displayed after the update is complete.

Chapter 3: System 87
" When the system attempts to write Node information to the external Node database, the potential for
access conflicts due to multiple users exists. If such an access conflict occurs, the system continues to
attempt to write to the database for a fixed amount of time (at this writing, five seconds) before reporting
failure to you via a dialog box. As long as you select the Retry button, the system continues to try to
access the database file. If you select Cancel, the system suspends its attempts to write to the
database for the duration of the current command. That is, if a command has five more Nodes to
create, it does not try to write to the database for those remaining five Nodes.

Figure 3-57 Update Node Information Dialog Box

Update Node Information Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Source to Target The Source to Target drop list allows you to select the direction of the update. You can update from
Drawing Database or Database to Drawing.
All in Source If this option is turned on, all Nodes in the Source are applied to the Target. This can result in both
changed Node information in the Target and new Nodes being added to the Target.
Common Nodes If this option is turned on, only information from Nodes that exist in both the Source and Target is applied.
Only This option does not allow any new Nodes to be created in the Target.
Selected Nodes Toggle this on so that you may graphically select which Nodes are to be applied.
Select Nodes This button allows you to select the Nodes you wish to update by different selection method. The different
methods are described in detail in the COGO documentation.
Please refer to COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box in the COGO documentation.
Report Only - Do If you turn this option on, no Nodes are updated. This allows you to view a report describing which Nodes
Not Apply would be added and/or updated.
Updates
Confirm New If you turn this option on, you are required to confirm every change to the target, whether the Node is
and Changed changed or added to the target. If the selected option under Source Nodes to Apply is Common Nodes
Nodes Only, this radio button is inactive, as there can be no new Nodes added to the target.
Confirm If you turn this option on, you are required to confirm any changes to Nodes in the target. Any additions
Changed Nodes are executed without your confirmation.
Only
Confirm New If you turn this option on, you are required to confirm any Node to be added to the target. Any changes to
Nodes Only existing Nodes are automatically executed without your confirmation. If the selected option under Source
Nodes to Apply is Common Nodes Only, this radio button is inactive, as there can be no new Nodes added
to the target.
Apply Updates, If you turn this option on, all additions and changes to the Target are performed with no request for
Do Not Confirm confirmation from you.
Report After Turning this toggle on allows you to display a report of the results of the Update Nodes Information
Target Updates command. The report is displayed in the Updated Nodes dialog box containing a list box of Node update
entries. The entries contain two fields each: the Node ID and the Update Status (ADDED/CHANGED).

QuickSteps
To Update Node Information, complete the following steps:

88 Eagle Point Menu

1. Select System ! Update Node Information.
The Update Node Information dialog box displays (Figure 3-57 on page 88).

Chapter 3: System

Chapter 3: System 89
 2. Select the desired option from the Source to Target drop list.
The available options are Drawing to Database and Database to Drawing.
3. Select the desired option in the Source Nodes to Apply Frame.
The available options are All in Source, Common Nodes Only and Selected Nodes.
4. Select the desired option in the Target Update options frame.
The available options are Report Only - Do Not Apply Updates, Confirm New and Changed Nodes,
Confirm Changed Nodes Only, Confirm New Nodes Only and Apply Updates, Do Not Confirm.
If you have selected the Apply Updates - Do Not Confirm option, you can toggle on the Report After
Target Updates option to view what was updated.
5. Click on OK.
The Node information settings are retained and the Updated Nodes dialog box is displayed
showing which Nodes have changed and what their status is if you have toggled on the Report
After Target Update option.
The Node ID displays the ID of the Nodes that were added/changed. The Status displays whether
the Nodes were added or changed.

Confirm New and Changed Nodes

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UPDATE NODE INFORM ATION ! CONFIRM NEW AND CHANG ED NODES

" The Confirm Add to Target dialog box (below) and the Confirm Change to Target dialog box (Figure 3-
59 on page 91) do not display if the Write Nodes To Method on the External Node Database dialog box
– Setup tab (Figure 3-52 on page 82) is set to Graphic and Database. This option automatically updates
both the graphic and database with the same Node information, thus bypassing the failsafe of the
confirmation dialog boxes.

When the Update Node Information command is executed and the Target option is set to Confirm New
and Changed Nodes, the graphic then database or the database then graphic is compared according to
the Source to Target setting on the Update Node Information dialog box. If a Node has been added or
changed in only one location, a dialog box displays, showing the difference. If the Node is new, the
Confirm Add to Target dialog box (below) displays. If the Node is changed, the Confirm Change to
Target dialog box (Figure 3-59 on page 91) displays.

Figure 3-58 Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box

Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Add new node This displays which Node ID is being added to the target.
ID
Northing This field displays the northing coordinate of the Node to be added to the target.
Easting This field displays the easting coordinate of the Node to be added to the target.
Elevation This field displays the elevation of the Node to be added to the target.

90 Eagle Point Menu

 Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Description This field displays the description of the Node to be added to the target.
Bypass If you toggle this on, you do not need to confirm the addition of Nodes to the target using this dialog box.
Confirmation of This toggle does not suppress the display of the Confirm Change to Target dialog box (below).
All Further Adds
Add This adds the Node to the Target location.
Do Not Add This does not add the Node to the Target location.

Figure 3-59 Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box

Chapter 3: System
Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Current Displays the current data (Source) for Northing, Easting, elevation and description.
New Displays the new data (Target) for Northing, Easting, elevation and description.
Node ID This column displays the identification of the Node to be changed.
Northing This column displays the Northing coordinate of the Node to be changed to the target.
Easting This column displays the Easting coordinate of the Node to be changed to the target.
Elevation This column displays the elevation of the Node to be changed to the target.
Description This column displays the description of the Node to be changed to the target.
Bypass If you toggle this on, you do not need to confirm the change of Nodes to the target using this Confirm
Confirmation of Change to Target dialog box. This toggle does not suppress the display of the Confirm Add to Target dialog
All Further Adds box (Figure 3-61 on page 92).
Change This makes the change to the Target location.
Do Not Change This does not make the change to the Target location.

Confirm Changed Nodes Only

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! UPDATE NODE INFORM ATION ! CONFIRM CHANG ED NODES ONLY

When the Update Node Information command is executed and the Target option is set to Confirm
Changed Nodes Only, the graphic then database, or the database then graphic, are compared

Chapter 3: System 91
 according to the Source to Target setting on the Update Node Information dialog box. If a Node has
been changed in only one location, a dialog box displays showing the difference.

Figure 3-60 Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box

Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Current Displays the current data (Source) for Northing, Easting, elevation and description.
New Displays the new data (Target) for Northing, Easting, elevation and description.
Node ID This column displays the identification of the Node to be changed.
Northing This column displays the Northing coordinate of the Node to be changed to the target.
Easting This column displays the Easting coordinate of the Node to be changed to the target.
Elevation This column displays the elevation of the Node to be changed to the target.
Description This column displays the description of the Node to be changed to the target.
Bypass If you toggle this on, you do not need to confirm the change of Nodes to the target using this dialog box.
Confirmation of
All Further Adds
Change This makes the change to the Target location.
Do Not Change This does not make the change to the Target location.

Confirm New Nodes Only

EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! UPDATE NODE INFORM ATION ! CONFIRM NEW NODES ONLY

When the Update Node Information command is executed and the Target option is set to Confirm New
Nodes Only, the graphic then database, or the database then graphic, are compared according to the
Source to Target setting on the Update Node Information dialog box (Figure 3-57 on page 88). If a Node
has been added in only one location, a dialog box displays, showing the difference.

Figure 3-61 Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box

Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Add new node This displays which Node ID is being added to the target.
ID
Northing This field displays the Northing coordinate of the Node to be added to the target.
Easting This field displays the Easting coordinate of the Node to be added to the target.

92 Eagle Point Menu

 Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Elevation This field displays the elevation of the Node to be added to the target.
Description This field displays the description of the Node to be added to the target.
Bypass If you toggle this on, you do not need to confirm the addition of Nodes to the target using this dialog box.
Confirmation of
All Further Adds
Add This adds the Node to the Target location.
Do Not Add This does not add the Node to the Target location.

EGPT Command Key-in

EAG LE POINT ! SYSTEM ! EG PT COM M AND KEY-IN

KEY-IN COMMAND: keyin

Chapter 3: System
The EGPT Command Key-in allows you to execute commands by their key-in command equivalent.
This is designed to increase your productivity so you do not have to select every command from the
appropriate menu. The EGPT Command Key-in option on the menu has a check mark in front of it if it is
currently being used. If there is not a check mark, the EGPT Command Key-in field is not displayed.
Selecting this command from the menu reverses the state of the check mark.
Refer to Appendix A – Command Locations in Getting Started for a brief description of all commands
that may be entered using the EGPT Command Key-in.
" Eagle Point commands may also be typed in the AutoCAD/BricsCad command line or in the
MicroStation key-in browser. This allows you to customize your own menus and toolbars inside of your
CAD package to execute Eagle Point commands.

Figure 3-62 EGPT Command Key-in Box

EGPT Command Key-in Box Definition

Option Function
Key-in This is an edit field and a most-recently-used drop list. The last ten commands display in the drop list,
allowing you to select them. You can also type a new command to execute a new command that is not in
the drop list.

Main Toolbar
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! M AIN TOOLBAR

KEY-IN COMMAND: maintool

The Main Toolbar command allows you to display the Eagle Point main toolbar. The Main Toolbar
option on the menu has a check mark in front of it if it is currently being used. If there is not a check

Chapter 3: System 93
 mark, the Eagle Point main toolbar is not displayed. Selecting this command from the menu reverses
the state of the check mark.

Figure 3-63 Eagle Point Main Toolbar

Products Toolbar
EAG LE POINT ! S YSTEM ! PRODUCTS TOOLBAR

KEY-IN COMMAND: prodtool

The Products Toolbar command allows you to display the Eagle Point Products Toolbar. The Products
Toolbar option on the menu has a check mark in front of it if it is currently being used. If there is not a
check mark, the Eagle Point Products Toolbar is not displayed. Selecting this command from the menu
reverses the state of the check mark.
For more information on the icons on the toolbar, see Products on page 125.

Figure 3-64 Products Toolbar

Dynamic Annotation
EAG LE POINT M ENU ! SYSTEM ! DYNAM IC A NNOTATION

KEY-IN COMMAND: dynannot

This option, when toggled on, makes the Eagle Point annotation dynamically update when a
modification is made to the annotated object. If this toggle is off and a modification is made to an
annotated object, the annotation does not automatically update. The dynamic link between the object
and annotation still exists so that if you set the Dynamic Annotation toggle back on and modify the
object, the annotation updates.

Dialogs on Top
EAG LE POINT M ENU ! S YSTEM ! DIALOG S ON TOP

KEY-IN COMMAND: ontop

This toggle controls whether the Eagle Point dialog boxes remain “Always on Top” (or “in front”) of CAD
when selecting objects in CAD. By default the toggle is off, which means when the PIC (Pick In CAD)
button is used to select objects (Nodes, lines, arcs, etc.) the Eagle Point dialog box “sinks” (or “goes
behind”) CAD until the selection is complete. When the toggle is turned on, the Eagle Point dialog
boxes remain “Always on Top” when the PIC button is used.

94 Eagle Point Menu

Embedded CAD Menus
EAG LE POINT M ENU ! S YSTEM ! EM BEDDED CAD M ENUS

$ This option is available for AutoCAD users only.

The Embedded CAD Menus command in the System menu on the main Eagle Point Menu palette can
be selected to enable AutoCAD menus to use in place of the Eagle Point menu palettes. When you run
Eagle Point with the Embedded CAD Menus option toggled on, the product menus append your
currently loaded menu. You may then select Eagle Point commands from your AutoCAD menus and
have the commands run without the Eagle Point Module palettes being loaded. Operating in this
fashion still requires the Eagle Point Main Menu palette to be open, but it can be minimized on the task
bar. You can copy and paste portions of the Eagle Point menu files into your normal AutoCAD menu so
that you can further customize your work environment. If you choose to perform this type of
customization, it is recommended that you do not configure Eagle Point to use the Embedded CAD
Menus. The module menu files are located in the ...\EGPT\PROGRAM folder and use the naming
convention of EGPT_??.MNU where the ?? is the two-letter module abbreviation. If you want to

Chapter 3: System
customize the Eagle Point menu files it is recommended that you do not remove any of the POP menus
themselves, just the items defined within them.
Network License Manager users should refer to Check-out/Return License on page 167.

Chapter 3: System 95
96 Eagle Point Menu
TOOLS
The Tools menu provides access to commands that interact with CAD.
You can create layer/level groups, manipulate layer/level groups and
CHAPTER
manipulate the states of the layers/levels. You can also set the scales for
the CAD graphic, set the view orientation and view perspective, capture
the scene of the CAD graphic and launch CAD.
In this chapter:
Manage Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Manage Level Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Manipulate Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manipulate Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Layer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4
Level Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Plot Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rotate View Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Capture Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Launch CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preview Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Converting Nodes from Softdesk/Land Development Desktop. . . 123

Chapter 4: Tools 97
Manage Layer Groups
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LAYER G ROUPS

KEY-IN COMMAND: lgroup

ICON:
The Manage Layer Groups command allows you to create a group that has layers associated with it.
These groups can be used in other commands to allow you to change the state of the layers in the
group all at one time instead of on an individual basis.
$ The drawing file must be open for this command. If the drawing file is not open when the
command is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch
CAD.

" The layer groups are defined per project, not drawing, and are included when a prototype is created.

Figure 4-1 Manage Layer Groups Dialog Box

Manage Layer Groups Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Group Name This list displays all of the layer groups that have been created.
Layers In Group This list displays all of the layers that are associated with the layer group that is highlighted.
Create New This icon allows you to create a new group of associated layers.
Layer Group
For more information, see New Layer Group on page 99.

Modify Layer This icon allows you to change the layers that are associated with the layer group that is
Group highlighted, as well as the name of the layer group.
For more information, see Modify Layer Group on page 99.
Copy Layer This icon allows you to duplicate the layer group that is highlighted.
Group
For more information, see Copy Layer Group on page 100.

Delete Layer This icon allows you to remove the layer group from the Group Name listing that is highlighted.
Group

Print Layer This icon allows you to print each layer group and all of the layers that are associated with the
Group layer group. The layer groups are printed to the printer or the file that is specified in the Printer
command.
For more information about the Printer Setup, see Print Setup on page 24.

98 Eagle Point Menu

New Layer Group
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LAYER G ROUPS ! CREATE NEW LAYER G ROUP

ICON:
The New Layer Group command allows you to create a new group of associated layers. This displays
all of the existing layers for the open drawing. The drawing file must be open for this command. If the
drawing file is not open when the command is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays,
informing you to launch CAD.

Figure 4-2 New Layer Group Dialog Box

New Layer Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Name This is the name of the layer group that you are creating.

Chapter 4: Tools
Layers In Group This list contains the layers that have been associated with this layer group. This is a multi-select list box,
so you can select more that one layer when you are removing them.
Add This adds any of the layers that are highlighted in the Existing Layers list to the Layers in Group List. The
layer is removed from the Existing Layers list so it is not added to the Layers in Group list more than one
time.
Remove This removes the highlighted layers from the Layers in Group list and places them back into the Existing
Layers list.
Existing Layers This list contains all of the layers that appear in the open drawing file. This is a multi-select list box, so you
can select more that one layer when you are adding them.

Modify Layer Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LAYER G ROUPS ! M ODIFY LAYER G ROUP

ICON:
The Modify Layer Group command allows you to make changes to an existing group of associated
layers. This displays all of the layers that are associated with the group and all of the existing layers for
the open drawing. The drawing file must be open for this command. If the drawing file is not open when
the command is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

Chapter 4: Tools 99
 See New Layer Group on page 99.

Figure 4-3 Modify Layer Group Dialog Box

Copy Layer Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LAYER G ROUPS ! COPY LAYER G ROUP

ICON:
The Copy Layer Group command allows you to duplicate an existing layer group and give it a new
name. This is beneficial if you want to create a layer group that is similar to another layer group. This
way, you do not have to select all of the same layers again to add to a new layer group. The drawing file
must be open for this command. If the drawing file is not open when the command is executed, an
Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

Figure 4-4 Copy Layer Group Dialog Box

Copy Layer Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
From Layer This drop list displays all of the available layer groups for which you are able to make a duplication.
Group
To Layer Group This is the name of the layer group that is given to the copy of the group selected in the From Layer Group
drop list.

100 Eagle Point Menu

Manage Level Groups
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LEVEL G ROUPS

KEY-IN COMMAND: lgroup

ICON:
The Manage Level Groups command allows you to create a group that has levels associated with it.
These groups can be used in other commands to allow you to change the state of the levels in the
group all at one time instead of on an individual basis.
$ The design file must be open for this command. If the design file is not open when the command
is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

" The level groups are defined per project, not design file, and are included when a prototype is created.

Chapter 4: Tools
Figure 4-5 Manage Level Groups Dialog Box

Manage Level Groups Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Group Name This list displays all of the level groupings that have been created.
Levels In Group This displays all of the levels that are associated with the level group that is highlighted.
Create New This allows you to create a new group of associated levels.
Level Group
For more information, see New Level Group on page 102.

Modify Level This allows you to change the levels that are associated with the level group that is highlighted,
Group as well as the name of the level group.
For more information, see Modify Level Group on page 102.
Copy Level This allows you to make a duplication of the level group that is highlighted.
Group For more information, see Copy Level Group on page 103.

Delete Level This allows you to remove the highlighted level group from the Group Name listing that is
Group highlighted.

Print Level This allows you to print each level group and all of the levels that are associated with the level
Group group. The level groups are printed to the printer or file that is specified in the Printer Setup
command.
For more information about Print Setup, see Print Setup on page 24.

Chapter 4: Tools 101

New Level Group
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LEVEL G ROUPS ! CREATE NEW LEVEL G ROUP

ICON:
The New Level Group command allows you to create a new group of associated levels. This displays
all of the levels and their names for the open design file. The design file must be open for this
command. If the design file is not open when the command is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog
box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

Figure 4-6 New Level Group Dialog Box

New Level Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Name This is the name of the level group that you are creating.
Levels in Group This list contains the levels that have been associated with this level group. This is a multi-select list box,
so you can select more that one level when you are removing them.
Add This adds any of the levels that are highlighted in the Existing Levels list to the Levels in Group list. The
level is removed from the Existing Levels list so it is not added to the Levels in Group List more than once.
Remove This removes the highlighted level from the Levels in Group list and place them back into the Existing
Levels list.
Existing Levels This list contains all of the levels and their names that appear in the open design file. This is a multi-select
list box, so you can select more than one level when you are adding them.

Modify Level Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LEVEL G ROUPS ! M ODIFY LEVEL G ROUP

ICON:
The Modify Level Group command allows you to make changes to an existing group of associated
levels. This displays all of the levels that are associated with the group and all of the levels and their
names for the open design file.
$ The design file must be open for this command. If the design file is not open when the command
is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

102 Eagle Point Menu

 See New Level Group on page 102.

Figure 4-7 Modify Level Group Dialog Box

Copy Level Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANAG E LEVEL G ROUPS ! COPY LEVEL G ROUP

The Copy Level Group command allows you to duplicate an existing level group and give it a new
name. This is beneficial if you want to create a level group that is similar to another level group. This
way, you do not have to select all of the same levels again to add to a new level group.
$ The design file must be open for this command. If the design file is not open when the command
is executed, an Eagle Point Message dialog box displays, informing you to launch CAD.

Chapter 4: Tools
Figure 4-8 Copy Level Group Dialog Box

Copy Level Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
From Level This drop list displays all of the available level groups for which you are able to make a duplication.
Group
To Level Group This is the name of the level group that is given to the copy of the group selected in the From Level Group
drop list.

Manipulate Layer Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANIPULATE LAYER G ROUPS

KEY-IN COMMAND: manlgroup

ICON:
The Manipulate Layer Group command allows you to change the states of all of the layers that are
associated with the selected layer group. You can turn on or off, freeze or thaw and lock or unlock the
layers associated with the selected layer group.

Chapter 4: Tools 103

 In order for the changes to take effect, you must click on Apply before you click on Close.
" This command only changes the state of the layers. This does not create new layers in the drawing file
if they do not exist. Also, you cannot freeze the current layer.

Figure 4-9 Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box

Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Group Name This drop list displays all of the layer groups that have been created using the Manage Layer Groups
command.
For more information about the Manage Layer Groups command, see Manage Layer Groups on page 98.
Layer Name This displays all of the layers that are associated with the group that is selected in the Group Name drop
list.
State This displays the state of the layers in the drawing file that is loaded. The states that display are On or Off,
F if the layer is frozen, T if the layer is thawed, L if the layer is locked and U if the layer is unlocked.
All This selects all of the layers in the group so the state can be changed for all layers at one time.
None This clears the selection of all of the layers in the group.
On This turns on all of the highlighted layers.
Off This turns off all of the highlighted layers.
Thaw This thaws all of the highlighted layers.
Freeze This freezes all of the highlighted layers except the current layer.
Unlock This unlocks all of the highlighted layers.
Lock This locks all of the highlighted layers.

Manipulate Level Group

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! M ANIPULATE LEVEL G ROUPS

KEY-IN COMMAND: manlgroup

ICON:
The Manipulate Level Group command allows you to change the states of all of the levels that are
associated with the selected level group. You can turn the levels in the selected views on or off. You can
globally freeze or thaw the levels or lock or unlock the levels in all views. Additionally, you can select the
Manage Level Group icon to create additional level groups to manipulate.

104 Eagle Point Menu

 The changes you make in the dialog box do not take effect unless you click on Apply before you click on
Close.

Figure 4-10 Manipulate Level Group Dialog Box

Manipulate Level Group Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Group Name This drop list displays all of the level groups that have been created using the Manage Level Groups
command.
For more information about the Manage Level Groups command, see Manage Level Groups on page 101.
# This displays all of the level numbers that are associated with the group that is selected in the Group
Name drop list.
Name This displays the level names for the level numbers that are associated with the group that is selected in
the drop list.
Views This displays a list of all the views in which the level state can be changed. To modify the list, turn the View
toggles below on or off as desired.

Chapter 4: Tools
All This selects all of the levels in the group so the state can be changed for all levels at one time.
None This clears the selection of all of the levels in the group.
View This displays all of the views in which the level state can be changed. It also shows the state of the
highlighted levels. There are three state options; on, off or indeterminate.
If the toggle has an X in it, it is on. When there is an X in the views and you click on the On button, the
levels that are highlighted are turned on in those views. When there is an X in the views and you click on
the Off button, the levels that are highlighted are turned off in those views.
If there is not an X (blank) in the toggle, it is off. When there is no X (blank) in the views and you click on
the On or Off button, nothing happens to the levels that are highlighted in those views.
If there is a gray X in the toggle, then it is indeterminate. When there is a gray X in the views and you click
on the On or Off button, nothing happens to the levels that are highlighted in those views.
On This turns on all of the levels that are highlighted in the views that have an X in them.
Off This turns off all of the levels that are highlighted in the views that have an X in them.

Layer Commands
The Layer Commands allow you to list object layers, freeze and thaw layers and turn layers on and off
graphically. The Layer Commands that are available are: Layer Control, List Object Layer, Set Current
Layer by Object, Freeze Object Layer, Turn off Object Layer, Isolate Object Layer by Freeze, Isolate
Object Layer by Off, Isolate Current Layer by Freeze, Isolate Current Layer by Off, Isolate Layer Group
by Freeze, Isolate Layer Group by Off, Thaw Previous, Turn on Previous, Thaw All, Turn On All and
Turn On and Thaw All. Detailed information on each of these commands follows.

Chapter 4: Tools 105

Layer Control
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! LAYER CONTROL

KEY-IN COMMAND: ddlmodes

The Layer Control command allows you to manipulate the layers within a drawing. You can create,
make current or rename layers; freeze and thaw layers; lock and unlock one or more layers; define the
color and linetype of the layers; control the visibility of selected layers; and filter the display of layers in
the Layer Name list box.
For a detailed discussion of the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, refer to the AutoCAD User’s
Guide or BricsCad documentation.

Figure 4-11 Layer Properties Manager Dialog Box

List Object Layer

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! LIST OBJECT LAYER

KEY-IN COMMAND: listl

The List Object Layer command provides a method to list the name of the layer on which an object
resides. When the command is selected, you are prompted Select objects:. Graphically select the
object for which you want to list the layer. The layer the selected object resides on is displayed. Click on
the PIC icon to report the layer of another object.

Figure 4-12 List Object Layer Dialog Box

106 Eagle Point Menu

 List Object Layer Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Layer This displays the layer on which the selected object resides.
PIC This icon allows you to select an object from the drawing. It also allows you to re-issue the
command to select different objects to determine the layers on which those objects reside.

QuickSteps
To list the layer of an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! List Object Layer.
The List Object Layer dialog box (Figure 4-12 on page 106) displays. The System displays the
message:
Select Object:
2. Graphically select the object whose layer name you want to view.
The system displays the layer name for the selected object.
3. If you want to select another object for which to list the layer, click on the PIC button on the
right side of the dialog box.
This reissues the command to select a different object.

Set Current Layer by Object

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! SET CURRENT LAYER BY OBJECT

Chapter 4: Tools
KEY-IN COMMAND: setcurl
The Set Current Layer by Object command provides a method to set the current layer as the layer on
which the selected object resides. This command allows you to graphically select an object to set the
current layer instead of having to determine the layer and then set the current layer manually.

QuickSteps
To set the current layer by selecting an object on that layer, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Set Current Layer by Object.
The system displays the message:
Select object:
2. Graphically select the object that resides on the layer you want to make current.

Freeze Object Layer

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! FREEZE OBJECT LAYER

KEY-IN COMMAND: frzlay

The Freeze Object Layer command provides a method to instruct the system to ignore all objects on a
specific layer. The system makes all objects that reside on the same layer as the selected object
invisible.

Chapter 4: Tools 107

" When a layer is frozen, the objects on that layer do not display, are not plotted and are not used during
calculations. The objects still exist in the drawing; they are just invisible.

QuickSteps
To freeze an object layer by selecting an object on that layer, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Freeze Object Layer.
The system displays the message:
Select objects:
2. Graphically select an object that resides on the layer you want to freeze.
You can continue to select object layers to freeze each time the system displays the message:
Select objects
or you may press the Enter key to terminate the command after selecting all objects. The layers for
the selected objects are frozen, provided it is not the current layer.

Turn Off Object Layer

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! TURN OFF OBJECT LAYER

KEY-IN COMMAND: loff

The Turn Off Object Layer command provides a method to turn off the layer that the selected object
resides on. All objects that reside on the selected layer are set to off. However, their color numbers and
linetypes are remembered and they are restored by setting the layer to on.
" When a layer is set to Off, the objects do not display and are not plotted. The objects still exist in the
drawing; they are just invisible.

QuickSteps
To turn off an object layer by selecting an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Turn Off Object Layer.
The system displays the message:
Select objects:
2. Graphically select an object that resides on the layer you want to set to Off.
You can continue to select object layers to turn off each time the system displays the message:
Select objects
or you may press the Enter key after selecting all desired objects. The layers for the selected
objects are turned off.

Isolate Object Layer By Freeze

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE OBJECT LAYER BY FREEZE

KEY-IN COMMAND: isolfrz

The Isolate Object Layer By Freeze command freezes all layers except the layer on which the selected
entity resides. The layer of the selected object is set to current and all other layers are frozen.

108 Eagle Point Menu

 QuickSteps
To freeze all layers excluding the desired layer, by selecting an object on that layer, complete the
following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Isolate Object Layer By Freeze.
The system displays the message:
Select object:
2. Graphically select an object that resides on the layer you do not want to freeze.
The system then makes the layer the selected object resides on the current layer and freezes the
remaining layers.

Isolate Object Layer by Off

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE OBJECT LAYER BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isoloff

The Isolate Object Layer by Off command provides a method to turn off all layers except the layer on
which the selected object resides. The layer of the selected object is set to current and all other layers
are turned off.

QuickSteps
To isolate a layer by turning all other layers off, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Isolate Object Layer by Off.

Chapter 4: Tools
The system displays the message:
Select object:
2. Graphically select an object that resides on the layer you do not want to set to Off.
The system then makes the layer the selected object resides on the current layer and sets the
remaining layers to Off.

Isolate Current Layer by Freeze

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE CURRENT LAYER BY FREEZE

KEY-IN COMMAND: isocurfrz

The Isolate Current Layer by Freeze command provides a method to freeze all layers except the
current layer. When you select Isolate Current Layer by Freeze from the Layer Commands submenu on
the Tools menu, the system freezes all layers except the current layer.

Chapter 4: Tools 109

Isolate Current Layer by Off
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE CURRENT LAYER BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isocuroff

The Isolate Current Layer by Off command provides a method to set all layers except the current layer
to off. When you select Isolate Current Layer by Off from the Layer Commands submenu on the Tools
menu, the system turns all layers except the current layer to off.

Isolate Layer Group by Freeze

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE LAYER G ROUP BY FREEZE

KEY-IN COMMAND: isolgfrz

The Isolate Layer Group by Freeze command freezes all layers except for the layers that are defined
for the layer group that is selected. If any of the layers in the group are frozen they are thawed. If the
current layer is not associated to the layer group selected, the system sets the current layer to be the
first layer associated with the layer group. This allows all layers to be frozen that are not associated with
the layer group.

Figure 4-13 Isolate Layer Group by Freeze Dialog Box

Isolate Layer Group by Freeze Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Group Name This list displays all of the layer groups that have been created using the Manage Groups command.
For more information about the Manage Layer Groups command, see Manage Layer Groups on page 98.
Layers In Group This displays all of the layers that are associated with the group that is highlighted.

QuickSteps
To isolate a layer group by freezing all other layers not associated with the group, complete the
following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Isolate Layer Group by Freeze.
The system displays the Isolate Layer Group by Freeze dialog box (above).
2. Select the layer group from the Group Name list and click on OK.
The system freezes all layers and then thaw all of the layers that are associated with the group. If
the current layer is one of the layers that are to be frozen, the current layer is changed to the first
layer listed in the layer group.

110 Eagle Point Menu

Isolate Layer Group by Off
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE LAYER G ROUP BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isolgoff

The Isolate Layer Group by Off command turns off all layers except for the layers that are defined for
the layer group that is selected. If any of the layers in the group are turned off, they are turned on. If the
current layer is not associated to the layer group selected, the system sets the current layer to be the
first layer associated with the layer group. This allows all layers that are not associated with the layer
group to be turned off.

Figure 4-14 Isolate Layer Group By Off Dialog Box

Isolate Layer Group By Off Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Group Name This list displays all of the layer groupings that have been created using the Manage Layer Groups
command.

Chapter 4: Tools
For more information about the Manage Layer Groups command, see Manage Layer Groups on page 98.
Layers In Group This displays all of the layers that are associated with the group that is highlighted.

QuickSteps
To isolate a layer group by turning off all other layers not associated with the group, complete the
following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Layer Commands ! Isolate Layer Group by Off.
The system displays the Isolate Layer Group by Off dialog box (above).
2. Select the layer group from the Group Name list and click on OK.
The system turns off all layers and then turn on all layers that are associated with the group. If the
current layer is a layer that is to be turned off, the current layer is changed to the first layer listed in
the layer group.

Thaw Previous Layer

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! THAW PREVIOUS

KEY-IN COMMAND: thawprev

The Thaw Previous command provides a method to reverse the effect of the Freeze Object Layer
command. This command thaws the last layer that was frozen by object. When you select Thaw
Previous from the Layer Commands submenu on the Tools menu, the system automatically thaws the
last layer that was frozen.

Chapter 4: Tools 111

Turn On Previous Layer
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! TURN ON PREVIOUS

KEY-IN COMMAND: onprev

The Turn On Previous command provides a method to reverse the effect of turning a layer off with the
Turn Off Object Layer command. This command restores the last object layer that was set to off. When
you select Turn On Previous from the Layer Commands submenu on the Tools menu, the system
automatically turns on the last layer that was turned off.

Thaw All Layers

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! THAW A LL

KEY-IN COMMAND: thawall

The Thaw All command provides a method to reverse all frozen layers. When layers are set to Thaw,
the objects associated with the layer are displayed, plotted and included in calculations. This command
only affects layers set to frozen. When you select Thaw All from the Layer Commands submenu on the
Tools menu, the system automatically thaws all frozen layers.

Turn On All Layers

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! TURN ON A LL

KEY-IN COMMAND: onall

The Turn On All command provides a method to turn all layers in the drawing on. When layers are set
to on, the objects associated with the layers are displayed and plotted. This command only affects
layers set to off. When you select Turn On All from the Layer Commands submenu on the Tools menu,
the system automatically sets all layers within the drawing to on.

Turn On and Thaw All Layers

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAYER COM M ANDS ! TURN ON AND THAW A LL

KEY-IN COMMAND: onthawall

The Turn On and Thaw All command provides a method to turn on all layers that are off and thaw all
layers that are frozen. When layers are set to On and Thaw, the objects associated with the layers are
displayed, plotted, and included in calculations. When you select Turn On and Thaw All from the Layer
Commands submenu on the Tools menu, the system automatically sets all layers within the drawing to
on and thawed.

Level Commands
The Level Commands allow you to list object levels and turn levels on and off graphically. The Level
Commands that are available are Level Display, List Object Level, Set Active Level by Object, Turn Off

112 Eagle Point Menu

 Object Level, Isolate Object Level by Off, Isolate Active Level by Off, Isolate Level Group by Off, Turn
On Previous and Turn On All.
Detailed information on all of these commands follows.

Level Display
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! LEVEL DISPLAY

KEY-IN COMMAND: vlevels

The Level Display option allows you to manipulate the levels within a design file. You can make a level
active and turn levels on and off in different views.
For a detailed discussion of the View Levels dialog box (below) refer to the MicroStation User’s Guide.

Figure 4-15 View Levels Dialog Box

Chapter 4: Tools
List Object Level
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! LIST OBJECT LEVEL

KEY-IN COMMAND: listl

The List Object Level command provides a method to list the number and name of the level on which
the object resides. When the command is selected, you are prompted Identify element. Graphically
select the object for which you want to list the level. The level the selected object resides on is
displayed. Click on the PIC icon to report the level of another object.

Figure 4-16 List Object Level Dialog Box

List Object Level Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Level This displays the level number and name of the level on which the selected object resides.
PIC This icon allows you to select an object from the design file. This allows you to re-issue the
command to select different objects to determine the level on which those objects reside.

Chapter 4: Tools 113

 QuickSteps
To list a level of an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Level Commands ! List Object Level.
The system displays the message:
Identify element
The List Object Level dialog box (Figure 4-16 on page 113) displays.
2. Graphically select and accept the object whose level number and name you want to view.
The system displays the level number and name for the selected object.
3. If you want to select another object for which to list the level number and name, click on the
PIC icon on the right side of the dialog box.
This reissues the command to select a different object.

Set Active Level by Object

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! S ET ACTIVE LEVEL BY OBJECT

KEY-IN COMMAND: setcurl

The Set Active Level by Object command provides a method to set the active level as the level on
which the selected object resides. This command allows you to graphically select an object to set the
active level instead of having to determine the level and then set the active level manually.

QuickSteps
To set the active level by selecting an object on that level, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Level Commands ! Set Active Level by Object.
The system displays the message:
Identify element
2. Graphically select and accept the object that resides on the level you want to make active.

Turn Off Object Level

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! TURN OFF OBJECT LEVEL

KEY-IN COMMAND: loff

The Turn Off Object Level command provides a method to turn off the level on which the selected
object resides. All objects that reside on the selected level are set to Off. However, their color numbers
and linestyles are remembered and they are restored by setting the level to on.
" When a level is set to off, the objects do not display and are not plotted. The objects still exist in the
design file; they are just hidden.

" You cannot turn the active level off.

QuickSteps
To turn off an object level by selecting an object, complete the following steps:

114 Eagle Point Menu

 1. Select Tools ! Level Commands ! Turn Off Object Level.
The system displays the message:
Identify element
Graphically select and accept an object that resides on the level you want to set to Off. You can
continue to select object levels to turn off. Each time the system displays the message:
Identify element
2. Otherwise, you may press the reset button on your pointing device after selecting all
desired objects.

Isolate Object Level by Off

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE OBJECT LEVEL BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isoloff

The Isolate Object Level by Off command provides a method to turn off all levels except the level on
which the selected object resides. The level of the selected object is set to active and all other levels
are turned off.

QuickSteps
To isolate a level by turning all other levels off, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Level Commands ! Isolate Object Level by Off.
The system displays the message:

Chapter 4: Tools
Identify element
2. Graphically select and accept an object that resides on the level you do not want to set to
Off.
The system then makes the level on which the selected object resides the active level and sets the
remaining levels to Off.

Isolate Active Level by Off

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE A CTIVE LEVEL BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isocuroff

The Isolate Active Level by Off command provides a method to set all levels except the active level to
Off. When you select Isolate Active Level by Off from the Level Commands submenu on the Tools
menu, the system turns all levels, except the active level, off.

Isolate Level Group by Off

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! ISOLATE LEVEL G ROUP BY OFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: isolgoff

The Isolate Level Group by Off command turns off all levels except for the levels that are defined for the
level group that is selected. If any of the levels in the group are turned off, they are turned on. If the
active level is not associated to the level group selected, the system sets the active level to be the first

Chapter 4: Tools 115

 level associated with the level group. This allows all levels that are not associated with the level group
to be turned off.

Figure 4-17 Isolate Level Group by Off Dialog Box

Isolate Level Group by Off Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Group Name This list displays all of the level groupings that have been created using the Manage Level Groups
command.
For more information about the Manage Level Groups command, see Manage Level Groups on page 101.
Levels In Group This displays all of the levels that are associated with the group that is highlighted.

QuickSteps
To isolate a level group by turning off all other levels not associated with the group, complete the
following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Level Commands ! Isolate Level Group By Off.
The system displays the Isolate Level Group by Off dialog box (above).
2. Select the level group from the Group Name list and click on OK.
The system turns off all levels and then turn on the levels that are associated with the group. If the
active level is one of the levels that are to be turned off, the active level is changed to the first level
listed in the level group.

Turn On Previous Level

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! TURN ON PREVIOUS

KEY-IN COMMAND: onprev

The Turn On Previous command provides a method to reverse the effect of turning a level off with the
Turn Off Object Level command. This command restores the last object level that was set to Off. When
you select Turn On Previous from the Level Commands submenu on the Tools menu, the system
automatically turns on the last level that was turned off.

Turn On All Levels

EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LEVEL COM M ANDS ! TURN ON A LL

KEY-IN COMMAND: onall

The Turn On All command provides a method to turn all levels in the design file on. When levels are set
to On, the objects associated with the levels are displayed and plotted. This command only affects

116 Eagle Point Menu

 levels set to Off. When you select Turn On All from the Level Commands submenu on the Tools menu,
the system automatically sets all levels within the design file to on.

Plot Scales
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! PLOT S CALES

KEY-IN COMMAND: plotscale

The Plot Scales command is specific to the CAD graphic file that is opened. This allows you to enter
Horizontal and Vertical Scales for the CAD graphic file that is opened.
The Scales group allows you to set the horizontal and vertical scales for the plan CAD graphic file that
is currently open. This is not used for cross-sections, templates, cross-section plots and mass diagram
plots, since they have their own scale settings.
The Scale setting affects how the text size setting and block/cell insertions are interpreted, how the
profile looks and how plan-and-profile sheets are formatted.
" In metric, the scale is a ratio (i.e., 1:500 for horizontal and 1:100 for vertical, which is equivalent to 1cm
= 5m and 1cm = 1m, respectively).

Chapter 4: Tools
Figure 4-18 Plot Scales Dialog Box

Plot Scales Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Horizontal This is the horizontal scale for the open CAD graphic file.
Vertical This is the vertical scale for the open CAD graphic file.

Chapter 4: Tools 117

Rotate View Orientation
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! ROTATE VIEW ORIENTATION

KEY-IN COMMAND: rotview

The Rotate View Orientation command allows you to rotate the plan view so that North points
somewhere other than to the top of the page. This feature is used by all products, allowing you to work
on the CAD graphic using the same orientation that is used during plotting.

Conditions for Rotating View Orientation

Product Conditions
COGO/Data Collection/Data These modules use this feature when a Node is placed. The
Transfer/Stakes command in Site insertion angle of the Node is oriented horizontally with respect to
Design the view.

All Other Eagle Point Products
Annotation is placed at a readable angle (within the range 0°-90° or
270°-360°) relative to the current view rotation.
Leadered annotation, annotation table entries, most symbology
and imported text are inserted with a rotation angle horizontal to
the current view rotation.
When annotation is placed along an element, ABOVE and BELOW
and LEFT and RIGHT are interpreted relative to the current view
rotation.

AutoCAD/BricsCad
The Rotate View option uses the DVIEW command with the Twist option. However, it does not perform
a UCS Rotation. Therefore, coordinates and directions are not affected by the Rotate View option.

MicroStation
The Rotate View option uses the Change View Rotation command and rotates the top view around the
Z axis. However, it does not perform an ACS Rotation. Therefore, coordinates and directions are not
affected by the Rotate View option.

" The cursor angle affects the ORTHO mode during drags.

Figure 4-19 Rotate View Orientation Dialog Box

Rotate View Orientation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Rotation Angle This is the angle that the view is rotated. Zero degrees is to the East and the angle is measured
in a counterclockwise direction. This angle can be either typed in or selected graphically using
the PIC button.
PIC This icon allows you to graphically select the rotation angle from the CAD graphic. This option is
only available in AutoCAD.

118 Eagle Point Menu

Capture Scene
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! CAPTURE SCENE

KEY-IN COMMAND: capscene

The Capture Scene command is used to take a “snapshot” of your CAD graphic. This stores the view
perspective and the state of all of your layers or levels. This allows you to name all of the scenes that
have been captured and restore the CAD graphic to those “snap-shots.”

AutoCAD/BricsCad
This command uses the Saved View command in AutoCAD/BricsCad and saves the states of the
layers. If you capture a scene and quit out of AutoCAD/BricsCad without saving the drawing, your
saved view is not kept. The capture scene still has the states of the layers set, but the view
perspective is not saved.

MicroStation
This command uses the Saved View command in MicroStation. MicroStation only allows six characters
for the name and 30 characters for the description. The Capture Scene command allows 30 characters
for the name. The first six are used for the name in MicroStation. If the first six characters of the
Capture Scene name are the same for more than one entry, MicroStation saves the scene to the first
name listed, overwriting the previous capture.

Chapter 4: Tools
Figure 4-20 Capture Scene Dialog Box

Capture Scene Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Scene Name This lists all of the scenes that have been created for the CAD graphic file.
Create New This icon allows you to add a new scene into the scene name listing.
Scene

Delete Scene This icon allows you to remove the scene from the listing.

Capture This takes a “snapshot” of the CAD graphic file for the highlighted scene in the listing. This
stores the view perspective and the state of the layers or levels.
Restore This changes the CAD graphic file to the view perspective and sets all of the layers or levels to
the states in which they were captured.

QuickSteps
To capture the scene of the CAD graphic, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Capture Scene.
This displays the Capture Scene dialog box (above).

Chapter 4: Tools 119

 2. Select the Create New Scene icon to display the New Scene dialog box. Type a name for the
scene in the Scene Name edit field and click on OK.
This adds the scene to the Scene Name listing.
3. Highlight the scene name in the listing and select the Capture button.
This takes a “snapshot” of the CAD graphic, storing the view perspective and the states of the
layers or levels. If you are capturing the scene in MicroStation, you need to select the view that you
want captured.
To restore a scene of the CAD graphic file, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools ! Capture Scene.
This displays the Capture Scene dialog box (Figure 4-20 on page 119).
2. Highlight the scene name to which you want to restore the CAD graphic.
3. Select the Restore button.
This sets the view perspective and all of the layers or levels to the states in which they were
captured. If you are restoring the scene in MicroStation, you need to select the view that you want
restored.

Launch CAD
EAG LE POINT ! TOOLS ! LAUNCH CAD

KEY-IN COMMAND: launchcad

The Launch CAD command loads the CAD package if it is not already loaded. This also loads the CAD
graphic file to the project or subproject that is open.
" The CAD package opens automatically if you highlight a CAD graphic file in the Open dialog box and
click on OK.

" By default, opening a project or subproject automatically launches CAD. To change this, use the
Configure Eagle Point command found in the Eagle Point Administrator program (EPADMIN.EXE).

Preview Objects
The Preview Objects command, found in several locations of the Eagle Point products, allows you to
display objects in an Open GL preview window instead of placing the objects in the CAD graphic. The
Open GL preview command allows you to zoom, pan and rotate the display. You can dynamically zoom,
zoom window, zoom extents and zoom previous. You can also dynamically pan in the preview. The
display can be rotated using the defined views of Top, Front and Isometric or by defining the X-Axis
Angle and the XY Plane Angle. The display settings allow you to specify which objects are on, the zoom
ratio, pan factor and display type for the objects. The display types that can be chosen are wireframe,
constant shading and hidden line removal.
The view prospective in the preview window is stored in memory when the Preview Objects dialog box
is closed. When the Preview Objects command is open subsequent times within the same session of
Eagle Point, the view prospective is restored. The Surface Model is also stored in memory. When the
command is opened subsequent times, the surface model is also restored. The surface model is not
restored in all commands. Commands that display a specific surface model (such as the Preview
Intersection command in the Intersection Design product) do not restore the surface model. When the

120 Eagle Point Menu

Preview Objects command is opened after Eagle Point has been closed, the Preview Objects dialog
box defaults to the top view and the first surface model in the drop list.
For more information on the display settings, see Display Settings on page 122.

Figure 4-21 Preview Objects Dialog Box

Preview Objects Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Zoom Dynamic This icon allows you to zoom in the preview window dynamically. To zoom in the preview
window, click on the Dynamic Zoom icon. Click and hold the primary button on your pointing
device in the preview window and move your cursor up to increase the size of the images in

Chapter 4: Tools
the preview window. Move your cursor down to decrease the size of the images in the
preview window. To stop zooming, release the primary button on your pointing device.
Zoom Window This icon allows you to zoom into an area in the preview window. To zoom into an area in the
preview window, click on the Zoom Window icon. Select the first corner of the zoom window
in the preview window and then the opposite corner of the zoom window.
Zoom Extents This icon allows you to center all of the objects in the preview window. This will zoom to the
extents of all of the objects that are turned on for display. For more information on the
objects turned on for display, see Preview Object Display Settings.
Zoom Previous This icon allows you to restore the objects in the preview window to their previous state.

Pan Dynamic This icon allows you to pan in the preview window dynamically. To pan in the preview
window, click on the Pan icon. Click and hold the primary button on your pointing device in
the preview window and move your cursor in the direction you want the images in the
preview to move. To stop panning, release the primary button on your pointing device.
Restore Top This icon will set the view for the preview window to the top view. This sets the X-Axis Angle
View to 270 degrees and the XY Plane Angle to 90 degrees.

Restore Front This icon will set the view for the preview window to the front view. This sets the X-Axis
View Angle to 270 degrees and the XY Plane Angle to 0 degrees.

Restore Iso View This icon will set the view for the preview window to an isometric view. This sets the X-Axis
Angle to 315 degrees and the XY Plane Angle to 45 degrees.

X-Axis Angle This is the angle from the X-Axis. The valid entries are from 0 degrees to 360 degrees. You
can enter in a desired value, or use the spinner to set the angle. A single click on the spinner
will adjust the angle by 1-degree increments. If you click and hold the cursor down on the
spinner, the angle will be adjusted by 5-degree increments.

Chapter 4: Tools 121

 Preview Objects Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
XY Plane Angle This is the angle from the XY plane. The valid entries are from -90 degrees to 90 degrees.
You can enter in a desired value, or use the spinner to set the angle. A single click on the
spinner will adjust the angle by 1-degree increments. If you click and hold the cursor down
on the spinner, the angle will be adjusted by 5-degree increments.
Display Settings These allow you to specify which objects are on, the zoom ratio, pan factor and display type
for the objects. The display types that can be chosen are wireframe, constant shading and
hidden line removal.
For more information on the display settings, see Display Settings (below).

Display Settings
The Preview Object Display Settings command allows you to specify which objects are previewed. The
list control displays all of the objects that can be previewed. Highlight the desired object and click on the
On or Off button to change whether the object is previewed. Also, you can double-click on an item in the
list control to change whether the object is previewed. The zoom ratio, pan factor and display type for
the objects can be controlled by clicking on the View Tab. The display types that can be chosen are
wireframe, constant shading, and hidden line removal.

Figure 4-22 Display Settings Dialog Box – Objects Tab

Display Settings Dialog Box – Objects Tab Definitions

Display Column This displays whether the object listed in the item column will be displayed or not. If the column is set to
On, then the object will be displayed in the preview window. If the column is set to Off, the object will not be
displayed in the preview window. To change the display state, highlight the desired object and click on the
On or Off button. You can also change the display state by double clicking on an item in the list control.
Item Column This displays the objects that can be previewed. All of the objects that are listed can be previewed. If the
display column is set to On, then the object will be displayed in the preview window of the Preview Objects
dialog box. If the display column is set to Off, the object will not be displayed in the preview window. To
change the display state, highlight the desired object and click on the On or Off button. You can also
change the display state by double clicking on an item in the list control.
On This allows you to turn the display of an object on so it is shown in the preview window of the Preview
Objects dialog box (Figure 4-21 on page 121). To turn an object on to be displayed in the preview window,
highlight the desired object and click on the On button.
Off This allows you to turn the display of an object off so it is not shown in the preview window of the Preview
Objects dialog box (Figure 4-21 on page 121). To turn an object off so it is not displayed in the preview
window, highlight the desired object and click on the Off button.

122 Eagle Point Menu

 Figure 4-23 Display Settings Dialog Box – View Tab

Display Settings Dialog Box – View Tab Definitions

Option Function
Zoom Ratio The Zoom Ratio controls how much larger or smaller the object displays in the preview window when you
use the Zoom In or Zoom Out commands. A Zoom ratio of 2 increases the size of the objects by two times
in the preview window in the Preview Objects dialog box (Figure 4-21 on page 121) when using the Zoom
In command and decreases the size of the objects by two times when using the Zoom Out command.
Pan Factor This controls how much the objects are displaced when using the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
View Type This allows you to control how solid objects are displayed in the preview. The available options are
Wireframe, Constant shading and Hidden line removal.
# Wireframe: When this option is selected, all elements are displayed. The elements are
transparent, so hidden lines are not removed.
# Constant Shading: When this option is selected, all elements are shaded according to their
color. Any objects that are behind a solid object are not displayed.

Chapter 4: Tools
# Hidden Surface removal: When this option is selected, only the parts of the objects that are
visible are displayed. Lines that are hidden behind other objects are removed or not displayed.

Converting Nodes from Softdesk/Land Development

Desktop
KEY-IN COMMAND: dca2ep
Eagle Point has created a command to convert DCA/Softdesk/Land Development Desktop Nodes so
they can be used within Eagle Point software. All Nodes that can be selected are converted to Eagle
Point Nodes and the view rotation of the drawing file is set to a top view. It is important that all layers
containing Nodes are turned on, thawed, and unlocked so they can be selected for the conversion
routine.
Not all versions and variations of DCA/Softdesk/Land Development Desktop Nodes can be converted
to Eagle Point Nodes. Point objects created with Land Development Desktop are not converted. These
point objects need to be converted to the Softdesk block format in Land Development Desktop before
you can convert them into Eagle Point Nodes.
Since not all versions of Nodes can be converted, it is also a good idea to have an ASCII file in a Point
Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description format provided. With this file, you can import the
Nodes into Eagle Point using commands in Data Collection and Data Transfer. You can also use
Surface Modeling to import the Nodes as an AutoCAD/BricsCad point.

Chapter 4: Tools 123

QuickSteps
To convert DCA/Softdesk/Land Development Desktop Nodes to Eagle Point Nodes, complete the
following steps.
1. Open the DCA/Softdesk/Land Development Desktop drawing with Eagle Point.
2. Turn on, thaw, and unlock all layers in the drawing file.
3. Type dca2ep at the command line.
All Nodes from a supported version of DCA/Softdesk/Land Development Desktop are converted to
Eagle Point Nodes. If the drawing had a North Rotation applied, the drawing is placed in a top view
the rotation applied to the Nodes.
4. Save the drawing file to a new name.
This allows you to keep the original Softdesk drawing as well as an Eagle Point drawing. The
drawing can now be used within Eagle Point.

124 Eagle Point Menu

PRODUCTS
The Products menu provides access to all of the Eagle Point products.
The products can be launched by selecting them from the menu or by
CHAPTER
using the More Products command. Also, you can customize the products
that are displayed in the Products menu.
In this chapter:
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Advanced Irrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Base Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ColorFast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Irrigation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Landscape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Quantity Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
RoadCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Water Surface Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
More Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Check-out/Return License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Chapter 5: Products 125

Eagle Point Menu
The Eagle Point menu is a tool used to create, set up and organize your projects. It allows you to
access options that are used among all of the Eagle Point products such as the Node (Field Code)
Library, External Node Database, CAD graphic manipulation tools, access to all of the Eagle Point
products and on-line help in a central location.

Figure 5-1 Eagle Point Menu

Eagle Point Menu Definitions

Option Function
File This allows you to create new projects and open, modify and delete existing projects. You can view
information about the project such as details, history, file manifest and client information.
For more information, see File on page 3.
System This allows you to set up your project with units, formats and precision, create prototypes of projects and
set CAD settings for the various commands in each product. Also, you can set up the External Node
Database, Node (Field Code) Library and set preferences for your software.
For more information, see System on page 27.
Tools This allows you to create layer/level groups and manipulate their states, such as turning them on or off,
changing the rotation of the CAD graphic, capturing scenes and launching the CAD package.
For more information, see Tools on page 97.
Products This allows you to access any of the Eagle Point products and customize what products display and the
order in which they display in the Products menu.
Help This allows you to view on-line Help for processes of completing a task and command help. Also, you can
view the entire Eagle Point documentation.

Figure 5-2 Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar

Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

New Project/Subproject/ Eagle Point → File → New
Additional CAD Graphic

Open Project/Subproject/ Eagle Point → File → Open

Additional CAD Graphic

Project Properties Eagle Point → File → Properties

CAD Settings Eagle Point → System → Project CAD Settings

Field Code Library Eagle Point → System → Node (Field Code) Library

Manage Layer/Level Groups Eagle Point → Tools → Manage Layer/Level Groups

Manipulate Layer/Level Groups Eagle Point → Tools → Manipulate Layer/Level Groups

126 Eagle Point Menu

Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

List Object Layer/Level Eagle Point → Tools → Layer/Level Commands → List Object Layer/
Level

Figure 5-3 Eagle Point Products Tool Bar

Eagle Point Products Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Coordinate Geometry Eagle Point → Products → Coordinate Geometry

Data Collection Eagle Point → Products → Data Collection

Data Transfer Eagle Point → Products → Data Transfer

Drafting Eagle Point → Products → Drafting

Survey Adjustment Eagle Point → Products → Survey Adjustment

Quantity Takeoff Eagle Point → Products → Quantity Takeoff

RoadCalc™ Eagle Point → Products → RoadCalc

Intersection Design Eagle Point → Products → Intersection Design

Profiles Eagle Point → Products → Profiles

Eagle Point → Products → Site Design

Chapter 5: Products
Site Design

Surface Modeling Eagle Point → Products → Surface Modeling

Sanitary Sewers Eagle Point → Products → Sanitary Sewers

Storm Sewers Eagle Point → Products → Storm Sewers

Watershed Modeling Eagle Point → Products → Watershed Modeling

Water Surface Profiling Eagle Point → Products → Water Surface Profiling

Base Plan Eagle Point → Products → Base Plan

Construction Details Eagle Point → Products → Construction Details

Chapter 5: Products 127

 Eagle Point Products Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Irrigation Design Eagle Point → Products → Irrigation Design

Landscape Design Eagle Point → Products → Landscape Design

Plant Database Eagle Point → Products → Plant Database

Site Planning Eagle Point → Products → Site Planning

Site Analysis Eagle Point ! Products ! Site Analysis

Advanced Irrigation Eagle Point ! Products ! Advanced Irrigation

Advanced Irrigation
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! A DVANCED IRRIG ATION

KEY-IN COMMAND: ai

ICON:
The Advanced Irrigation software can assist you in determining the available flow rate and working
pressure for inserting P.O.C.s. There are a variety of commands available for managing site models,
working with contour elevations, and inserting property lines. Use the Heads commands to specify
which head is associated with head location commands, modify head properties, and place sprinklers.
The heads can be placed into user-defined zones for which watering schedules can be set. The Pipes
commands are valuable tools that aid in choosing the appropriate size, type, placement, and layout for
the pipes in your design. Advanced Irrigation’s databases offer a wide variety of manufacturers, as
well as all the associated specifications included. In addition to these features, the Tools menu provides
you with commonly used items for your design, sheet graphics options, inquiry commands, and
methods for inserting text into the drawing.

Figure 5-4 Advanced Irrigation Menu

Advanced Irrigation Menu Definitions

Option Function
P.O.C. Specify whether you are using a municipal water supply or utilizing a pump. Once this is determined, you
indicate the static pressure at the source and flow rates. When that information is entered, you can identify
the elevation change as well as the type of pipe. You also have the ability to select the model of backflow
preventer and any other items that influence the flow rate or operating pressure.

128 Eagle Point Menu

Advanced Irrigation Menu Definitions
Option Function
Site Prep Use the Manage Surface Models command to add a new surface model or modify, copy, delete, print, or
query an existing surface model. The Change Contour Elevation command changes the elevation of the
contours that are selected. The Triangulate Surface Model command creates a surface model of selected
objects such as points, lines, arcs, shapes, and blocks/cells. The Triangulate Surface Model from
Contours command optimizes creating surface models from contour maps. The Preview Objects
command allows you to see the contours without having CAD loaded. The Label Contours commands
provide you with several options for automatically placing elevation labels on contours in your drawing.
The Track Elevation command displays the Northing (Y), Easting (X), and Elevation (Z) coordinates for the
surface model selected. The Change Elevation command lets you quickly change the elevations of
elements in your CAD graphic. The Input Property Line command allows you to lay out a property line
using several of the most common notations found on blueprints or other documents from surveyors and
engineers. The Building Footprint command allows you to create a building footprint. The Locate Plant
command allows you to place plant material into the drawing.
Heads The Head Configuration command allows you to specify which head is associated with head location
commands. The Locate Single command allows you to place sprinklers individually. The Locate on Edge
command allows you to place user-defined sprinklers along the edge of a turf area. The Automatic
Location command allows you to locate all the sprinkler heads inside a given area (defined by a closed
polyline) in a single step. The Locate by Array command allows you to array a sprinkler in order to get
multiple copies of that sprinkler over a large area. The Locate in Fairway command allows you to place
sprinkler heads in a fairway. The Modify Head command allows you to graphically select heads in the
drawing and modify the head properties. The Show Coverage command is a toggle that turns the
coverage arcs on or off. The purpose of the Layout Template command is to place a hatch pattern inside
an area to be irrigated.
Zones The purpose of the Assign Zone command is to group all heads into a zone. The Attach to Satellite
command operates along the same principles as the Assign Zones command, except that it is designed
for valve in head systems. The Query Zone Data command allows you to select a sprinkler head or a zone
valve to see all associated information for that zone. The Remove Zone command allows you to delete
items from an assigned P.O.C. They include the zone or heads. Labeling your sprinkler heads with the
Zone ID clarifies the head-to-zone relationships. The purpose of the Label Zone command is to insert a
label tag that identifies a zone and indicates the total discharge required for that zone. The Water Usage
Schedule command calculates the precipitation rate and operating times in minutes per day, as well
generates a report based on these calculations. The Water Usage Report command produces a report
based on the calculations in the Water Usage Schedule command. The Locate Wire command gives you
the ability to select the type of wire to be used in the design from an extensive database of wire types and
gauges.
Pipes The Pipe Configuration command allows you to choose the default lateral and mainline pipes to use when
placing these pipes into the drawing. The purpose of the Draw Lateral Pipe command is to allow you to
manually lay out the lateral pipes within a zone. The purpose of the Draw Mainline Pipe command is to
graphically show how the water gets from the sources (such as a water meter near the property line or
connection point to the domestic water supply) out to each of the individual zones and their respective

Chapter 5: Products
valves. The Auto Layout command provides you with a means to have the computer make a preliminary
decision as to how the pipes in a specified zone should be routed. The purpose of the Autosize Laterals
command is to take an initial pipe layout, convert it to appropriately sized pipe objects, and label the
objects for graphic purposes at the same time. The purpose of the Autosize Mainlines command is to take
an initial pipe layout, convert it to the appropriately sized pipe objects, and label the objects for graphical
purposes at the same time. The purpose of the Edit Existing Pipe command is to change one type of pipe
to another type of pipe. The purpose of the Edit Pipe Label command is to change from one label style to
another in order to make your plan appear more graphically pleasing. The purpose of the Insert Jump Pipe
command is to place an arc over two lines that appear to intersect, but which are not connected in the real
world. The Pipe Sleeve command locates pipe sleeves in your drawing.
Drip The purpose of the Drip Subsurface command is to provide a utility for laying out Netafim-type subsurface
drip irrigation systems. The Emitter Location command locates individual emitters for each selected plant
and draws the drip tubing if necessary. The purpose of the Drip Area command is to locate areas on the
plan that are to be specified as drip, without showing all of the actual emitters.
Equipment The Equipment Symbol command is used to place irrigation equipment symbols that are not otherwise
accounted for in an irrigation design. The Equipment Table command is used to create a table format in
which to display information about the equipment placed in your drawing.
Evaluation The Evaluate POC command performs an evaluation on the selected point of connection. It is meant to be
a tool to assist in the design process to catch a problem before the plan set is released.

Chapter 5: Products 129

 Advanced Irrigation Menu Definitions
Option Function
Database The Advanced Irrigation module utilizes five major database categories. These databases have a wide
variety of manufacturers, as well as all the associated specifications included. All databases are
customizable, so you have complete control over the contents. The information in these databases is
located the Support folder of Eagle Point. These databases should be backed up after editing.
Tools The Sheet Layout submenu provides you with commonly used items for your design. The sheet graphics
options available to you include Hatch, Edge Stipple, Veg Line, Break Line/Disc Line, and Change Width.
Inquiry commands allow you to calculate the line segments and polyline segments on a selected object’s
layer/level or calculate the area of all closed polylines on a selected object’s layer/level. The Insert Text
File command allows you to insert a block of ASCII text into the drawing. The Place Text On Polyline
command allows you to enter a text string and have it follow the path of a polyline. The Edit Text String
Globally command allows you to make changes to multiple pieces of the same text.

Figure 5-5 Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar

Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Head Configuration Advanced Irrigation ! Heads ! Configuration

Auto Locate Heads Advanced Irrigation ! Heads ! Auto Locate

Locate Heads on Edge Advanced Irrigation ! Heads ! Locate on Edge

Locate Heads by Array Advanced Irrigation ! Heads ! Array Locate

Locate Single Head Advanced Irrigation ! Heads ! Locate Single

Pipe Configuration Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Configuration

Locate Lateral Pipe Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Locate Lateral

Locate Mainline Pipe Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Locate Mainline

Auto Locate Pipes Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Auto Locate

Auto Size Laterals Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Auto Size Laterals

Auto Size Mainlines Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Auto Size Mainlines

Jump Pipe Advanced Irrigation ! Pipes ! Jump Pipe

130 Eagle Point Menu

 Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Locate Drip Subsurface Advanced Irrigation ! Drip ! Locate Subsurface

Locate Drip Emitter Advanced Irrigation ! Drip ! Locate Emitter

Drip Area Advanced Irrigation ! Drip ! Area

Base Plan
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! BASE PLAN

KEY-IN COMMAND: bp

ICON:
The Base Plan product provides a set of tools that can be used in setting up base plan elements, such
as property lines, title blocks, letter tools, etc.

Figure 5-6 Base Plan Menu

Base Plan Menu Definitions

Option Function
Layout The commands on the Layout menu assist you with basic layout of your base plan. These commands
allow you to input a property line, label baseline offsets, draw a reference grid, rotate your cross hairs,
import points, label stations, annotate lines and curves, write a legal description, create curve and line
tables and insert North arrows and scales.

Chapter 5: Products
Topo The commands in this menu allow you to set elevations and draw contours.
Blocks These commands allow you to substitute blocks and change your scale and attributes.
Lettering These commands allow you to use and manipulate text in your CAD graphic.
Lines These commands allow you to insert and manipulate a variety of line entities in your CAD graphic.
Tools These commands allow you to manipulate layers, objects and hatch patterns.
Presentation This menu provides options for perspective and elevation viewing.

Figure 5-7 Base Plan Tool Bar

Base Plan Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Label Lines Base Plan → Layout → Annotate Lines

Chapter 5: Products 131

 Base Plan Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Label Curves Base Plan → Layout → Annotate Curves

Line Table Base Plan → Layout → Create Line Table

Curve Table Base Plan → Layout → Create Curve Table

Spot Elevation Base Plan → Topo → Spot Elevation

Contour Line Base Plan → Topo → Contour Line

Label Crossings Base Plan → Topo → Contour Tools → Label → Crossings

Profile Base Plan → Topo → 3D Tools → Profile

Scales Base Plan → Layout → Insert Scale

North Arrows Base Plan → Layout → Insert North Arrows

Block Substitution Base Plan → Blocks → Substitute

Change Block Scale Base Plan → Blocks → Change Scale

Select new text font Base Plan → Lettering → Select Font

Hatch Face Base Plan → Tools → Hatch Face

p Copy and Rotate Base Plan → Tools → Copy and Rotate

Move and Rotate Base Plan → Tools → Move and Rotate

Multicopy Base Plan → Tools → Copy Multiple

Multiscale Base Plan → Tools → Scale Multiple

Running Distance Base Plan → Tools → Running Distance

132 Eagle Point Menu

ColorFast
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! COLORFAST

ColorFast enables you to instantly apply artistic rendering tools to your CAD drawings, simulating the
effects of hand coloring in seconds. You can define solid or gradient fill colors, custom outline colors,
and change the display order of objects by moving them behind or in front of one another.
ColorFast works equally well with AutoCAD and BricsCad.
Paper layout is easy with a graphic interface that lets you move, scale, and rotate the sheet into position
in one step. The paper display shows both outer edges and borders, giving you maximum control of the
final output.
You can save and update prototype settings for fast setup and drawing creation. Customized paper
sizes, color palettes, font mappings, pen widths, and layer definitions are at your disposal for maximum
productivity and drafting standards.

Figure 5-8 ColorFast Menu

ColorFast Menu Definitions

Option Function
Paper When you select Define Paper from the ColorFast CAD menu, the Define Paper dialog box displays. Use
the controls in this dialog box to define the characteristics of the paper on which you want to plot your
ColorFast drawing. Position Paper allows you to update the ColorFast paper's position in the drawing.
Drawing When you select Create ColorFast Drawing from the Drawing menu, a new ColorFast drawing is created
and opened in the ColorFast Application window. The new ColorFast drawing contains all the CAD
drawing objects that are visible inside the limits of the ColorFast paper that was defined with ColorFast's
Define Paper command. When you select Open ColorFast Drawing from the ColorFast CAD menu, the
current ColorFast drawing is created and opened in the ColorFast Application window.
Settings Options include: Use ColorFast template, Gradient Quality, Use Polyline Widths, and Display CAD Point
Entities.
Help When you select Help from the ColorFast menu, the ColorFast documentation is displayed using Adobe
Acrobat Viewer. Use the controls in the Adobe Acrobat Viewer program to read and navigate the
ColorFast documentation.

Chapter 5: Products
Figure 5-9 ColorFast Tool Bar

ColorFast Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Define Paper ColorFast ! Paper ! Define Paper

Position Paper ColorFast ! Paper ! Position Paper

Create ColorFast Drawing ColorFast ! Drawing ! Create ColorFast Drawing

Chapter 5: Products 133

 ColorFast Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Open ColorFast Drawing ColorFast ! Drawing ! Open ColorFast Drawing

Options ColorFast ! Settings ! Options

Construction Details
ICON:
The Construction Details module is a comprehensive set of over 2000 pre-built construction details.
Details come in AutoCAD DWG format and include manufacturer specific details, such as Alpha
Precasts - site furniture, Bomanite - paving patterns, TORO - irrigation equipment, and WeatherMatic -
irrigation equipment.

Figure 5-10 Construction Details Menu

Construction Details Menu Definition

Option Function
Details These professional details can be used anytime you need installation specification of the conceptual
elements. Details are grouped into three main categories: civil, irrigation, and site. Details are fully
customizable to fit your specific needs. Previously created details can be integrated with LandCADD
Construction Details to form your own customized library.

Figure 5-11 Construction Details Tool Bar

Construction Details Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Locate Details Construction Details ! Details ! Locate

Manage Details Construction Details ! Details ! Manage

134 Eagle Point Menu

Coordinate Geometry
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! COORDINATE G EOM ETRY

KEY-IN COMMAND: epcg

ICON:
Coordinate Geometry (COGO) uses a combination of the mathematical concepts of trigonometry and
some basic surveying principles to allow you to input and query information in a CAD graphic in an
intuitive and flexible manner. COGO may be used to create, query and print out full reports on points,
Nodes, lines, curves, spirals, alignments, cul-de-sacs, traverses and lots. COGO may also be used to
input traverses from field notes, lot design and layout, intersection and lot cleanup, as well as batch
processing and an audit trail on most all placement/modification to objects in the project.

Figure 5-12 COGO Menu

COGO Menu Definitions

Option Function
Nodes This allows you to place and modify Nodes in the project.
Survey This allows you to manage, input and record traverse and alignment information. Data may also be
manipulated to match a grid or state plane system of coordinates once it is entered.
Construct This allows you several different ways to create lines, arcs and spirals in the CAD graphic. You can
construct best fit lines, feature lines, inscribed curves and spirals and reverse curves, to name a few.
Intersect This allows you to use points, Nodes and objects to establish the location of other points and Nodes by a
combination of direction, distance, offset and station value.
Layout This allows you to create bounded regions by area, lots, cul-de-sacs and parking lots. You may also
convert existing objects to alignments or lots.
Report This allows you to query or generate a report from selected Nodes, lines, arcs, spirals and alignments.
Several different types of reports are available for Nodes, angles, areas, inversion, station/offset or
stakeout purposes.
Settings This allows you to set the default values and methods for input of Nodes, directions, distances, angles,

Chapter 5: Products
etc.

Figure 5-13 COGO Tool Bar

COGO Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Place Nodes COGO → Nodes → Place Nodes

Snap Nodes to Object COGO → Nodes → Snap to Object

Edit Node COGO → Nodes → Edit

Chapter 5: Products 135

 COGO Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Batch Files COGO → Survey → Manage Batch Files

Edit Batch File COGO → Survey → Edit Batch File

Boundary Traverse COGO → Survey → Boundary Traverse

Field Data Traverse COGO → Survey → Field Data Traverse

Translate-Rotate-Scale COGO → Survey → Translate-Rotate-Scale

Offset COGO → Construct → Offset

Construct Through Nodes COGO → Construct → Through Nodes

Intersect Direction-Direction COGO → Intersect → Direction-Direction

Intersect Direction-Distance COGO → Intersect → Direction-Distance

Convert Objects to Alignment COGO → Layout → Convert Objects to Alignment

Convert Objects to Lot COGO → Layout → Convert to Lot

Report Nodes COGO → Report → Nodes

Resolve Duplicate Nodes COGO → Report → Duplicate Nodes

Report Single Station/Offset COGO → Report → Single Station/Offset

Report Area COGO → Report → Area

Report Angle COGO → Report → Angle

Inverse Points COGO → Report → Inverse Points

Inverse Object COGO → Report → Inverse Object

136 Eagle Point Menu

Data Collection
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! DATA COLLECTION

KEY-IN COMMAND: epdc

ICON:
Data Collection utilizes direct links with several supported data collectors and data collector formats to
download raw instrument and coordinate data. This information may be previewed, error-checked and
processed into the CAD graphic. Existing roads, walls, gutter and sidewalk sections can be created
quickly and easily in the CAD graphic. Use of special designators and cross-section patterns as well as
3-D templates within Data Collection has made this process easier.
Information may also be exported or uploaded from your CAD graphic or database directly to your data
collector for stakeout or setout functions in the field.

Figure 5-14 Data Collection Menu

Data Collection Menu Definitions

Option Function
Jobs This allows you to create survey jobs by downloading or importing raw or coordinate
survey information. You may preview, edit and reduce the jobs directly into your project.
Processing warnings and the resultant coordinates from shot averaging may be viewed,
the job file can be edited and a preview or reduction can take place again while
automatically deleting the information and replacing it back in the project. Nodes from the
project may also be uploaded or exported for stakeout in the field.
Options This allows you to customize the settings and the line designators for processing your
survey information. You may also establish the CAD properties of the lines generated, and
design cross-section patterns and 3-D line templates to automate the placement of the
line work. If you have a customizable data collection system, such as Leica or
Geodimeter, you may also customize your codes that are used to process the survey
information to closely match your current field procedures.
Query This allows you to view processing warnings, shot averaging results, backup files for

Chapter 5: Products
comparison and other general file information. You may report the Nodes in the project,
and list any unused or duplicate Nodes that exist.

Figure 5-15 Data Collection Tool Bar

Data Collection Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Download From Collector Data Collection → Jobs → Download from Collector

Upload to Collector Data Collection → Jobs → Upload to Collector

Import ASCII File Data Collection → Jobs → Import ASCII File

Chapter 5: Products 137

 Data Collection Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Export Nodes Data Collection → Jobs → Export Nodes

Edit Instrument File Data Collection → Jobs → Edit Instrument File

Edit Formatted File Data Collection → Jobs → Edit Formatted File

Reduce Jobs Data Collection → Jobs → Reduce

Manage Jobs Data Collection → Jobs → Manage

Reduction Settings Data Collection → Options → Settings

Line Work Data Collection → Options → Line Work

Cross-Sections Data Collection → Options → Cross-Section Patterns

3D Line Templates Data Collection → Options → 3-D Line Templates

Query Warnings Data Collection → Query → Warnings

Query Backup File Data Collection → Query → Backup File

Query File Information Data Collection → Query → File Information

Query Nodes Data Collection → Query → Nodes

Resolve Duplicate Nodes Data Collection → Query → Resolve Duplicate Nodes

Data Transfer
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! DATA TRANSFER

KEY-IN COMMAND: epdt

ICON:
Data Transfer uses predefined formats to import and export information that you may use with your
project. User-definable ASCII file formats for coordinate and station/offset information may be created
for specific purposes. Files that are in one format may be converted to one of the many supported
formats or to a user-definable format that you have created. Reports of data may be generated to

138 Eagle Point Menu

determine what information lies in the project and what Node ranges are available, as well as any errors
that may occur during processing are reported back to you.

Figure 5-16 Data Transfer Menu

Data Transfer Menu Definitions

Option Function
Transfer This allows you to import or export data using any of the available format filters. Commands are available
to preview an import and check for duplicate Nodes before importing. Files may also be converted from
one format to another using the Convert File command. Settings are available on import for how to place
the points in the CAD graphic, setting the default Field Code, adding a point number value to the file or
importing by using both a range of point numbers and/or elevations. Settings for export include adding a
point number value to the file and establishing the precision of each value exported. You may also select
the editor of your choice when editing.
Formats This allows you to create your own user-definable format. The format may be delimited or space-
dependent, which may be comprised of coordinate, point numbers, descriptors, station/offset, instrument
heights and rod readings.
Report This allows you to report the Nodes that already exist in the project, report ranges unused by Nodes,
generate station/offset information and report any errors that occurred while processing a file.

Figure 5-17 Data Transfer Tool Bar

Data Transfer Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Import File Data Transfer → Transfer → Import File

Export Data Data Transfer → Transfer → Export Data

Settings Data Transfer → Transfer → Settings

Chapter 5: Products
Create Format Data Transfer → Formats → Create

Report Nodes Data Transfer → Report → Nodes

Report Station/Offset Data Transfer → Report → Station/Offset

Report Warnings Data Transfer → Report → Warnings

Chapter 5: Products 139

Drafting
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! DRAFTING

KEY-IN COMMAND: dr

ICON:
Drafting allows you to annotate objects in your CAD graphic according to your standards. Alignments,
areas, coordinates, curves, lines, lots, spirals and station offsets can all be annotated. The annotation is
updated when an object is modified with Eagle Point’s Dynamic Annotation. You can create tables of
information and insert standard symbols such as North arrows, bar scales and title blocks. Also, you
can pattern lines, place text and write legal descriptions.

Figure 5-18 Drafting Menu

Drafting Menu Definitions

Option Function
Annotate This allows you to place text annotation for alignments, areas, coordinates, curves, lines, lots, spirals and
station offsets. You can also customize how each of these objects is annotated with the Annotation Styles.
Create Tables This allows you to place information about alignments, curves, lines, lots, Nodes and spirals into separate
tables.
Insert This allows you to insert symbols into the CAD graphic. Some of the symbols that can be inserted are
North arrows, bar scales, coordinate grids and title blocks.
Modify This allows you to change the aspect ratio and elevations of objects. You can match and set the
symbology from a selected object, join 3-D complex objects, break, extend and trim objects.
Text This allows you to write legal descriptions of lots, easements and alignments. You can also import or
export text, as well as place text above, along, below or leadered to an object.

Figure 5-19 Drafting Tool Bar

Drafting Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Annotate Alignment Stationing Drafting → Annotate → Alignment Stationing

Annotate Area Drafting → Annotate → Areas

Annotate Multiple Objects Drafting → Annotate → Multiple Objects

Annotate Coordinates Drafting → Annotate → Coordinates

Annotate Curves Drafting → Annotate → Curves

Annotate Lines Drafting → Annotate → Lines

140 Eagle Point Menu

 Drafting Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Annotate Lots Drafting → Annotate → Lots

Annotate Styles Drafting → Annotate → Styles

Create Alignment Table Drafting → Create Tables → Alignment Table

Create Curve Table Drafting → Create Tables → Curve

Create Line Table Drafting → Create Tables → Line

Create Lot Table Drafting → Create Tables → Lot

Insert Arrowhead Drafting → Insert → Arrowhead

Insert Bar Scale Drafting → Insert → Bar Scale

Insert Border Drafting → Insert → Border

Insert North Arrow Drafting → Insert → North Arrow

Write Legal Description Drafting → Text → Write Legal Description

Intersection Design
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! INTERSECTION DESIG N

Chapter 5: Products
KEY-IN COMMAND: epit

ICON:
The Intersection Design product provides the necessary tools to model and analyze intersections,
from the simplest subdivision intersection to the most complex intersections of superelevated, divided
highways.
Intersection Design uses your initial designs from RoadCalc™ and then employs a planimetric, site
design approach to finalize your pavement cross-slopes, islands and median design, and water
flowlines into a surface model. Pavement and earthwork volumes are obtained from defining pavement
regions (plan areas) and depths while earthworks are calculated by prismoidal surface-to-surface
volumes.

Chapter 5: Products 141

 Because the intersection design is stored as a surface model, other products can directly access
design data to produce final contour maps and 3-D presentation models.

Figure 5-20 Intersection Design Menu

Intersection Design Menu Definitions

Option Function
Layout This allows you to create intersections, modify the intersection boundaries, layout pavement control lines,
and create utilities. Once pavement control lines are created, you can add a radius, chamfer, or bull nose
between pavement control lines. You also have the ability to place triangular and circular islands as well
as rectangular, single turn lane and double turn lane medians within the intersection.
Design This allows you to modify the vertical geometry for the pavement control lines. It also allows you to define
pavement areas and attach curb and parallel components to pavement control lines. Once the horizontal
and vertical geometry is defined, you can project slope from the intersection objects to tie them into an
existing ground surface model.
Query This allows you to check the intersection design to verify the data compared to the RoadCalc™ data at
the boundary conditions. You can also analyze the site for problem areas using the Slope Analysis,
Display Flowline, and Find Ponding Areas commands.
Output This allows you to display quantities such as length, area, and volumes for the intersection. You can also
place spot elevation labels, construct 3-D lines of the intersection geometry, and project objects to the
intersection surface model.

Figure 5-21 Intersection Design Tool Bar

Intersection Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Intersections Intersection Design ! Layout ! Manage Intersections

Pavement Control Lines Intersection Design ! Layout ! Pavement Control Lines

Clean-up Intersection Lines Intersection Design ! Layout ! Clean-up Intersection Lines

Lane Transitions Intersection Design ! Layout ! Lane Transitions

Islands/Medians Intersection Design ! Layout ! Islands/Medians

Edit Profile Data Intersection Design ! Design ! Edit Profile Data

Define Areas Intersection Design ! Design ! Define Areas

Attach Curb Component Intersection Design ! Design ! Attach Curb Component

142 Eagle Point Menu

 Intersection Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Project Slopes Intersection Design ! Design ! Project Slopes

Check Boundary Conditions Intersection Design ! Query ! Check Boundary Conditions

Display Flowlines Intersection Design ! Query ! Display Flowlines

Find Ponding Areas Intersection Design ! Query ! Find Ponding Areas

Preview Intersection Intersection Design ! Query ! Preview Intersection

Intersection Quantities Intersection Design ! Output ! Intersection Quantities

Irrigation Design
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! IRRIG ATION DESIG N

KEY-IN COMMAND: ir

ICON:
This product is part of the professional series of applications available from Eagle Point, for use with a
full copy of a CAD program.
Users of previous versions may notice some changes. Obviously, the most notable change is using a
separate Windows application, rather than functionality built into and limited to CAD. However, there

Chapter 5: Products
are other fundamental changes as well. First, the head editing commands have been removed and
functionality is being handled by reactor technology. Second, databases associated with sprinklers and
pipes are now industry standard Access files that can be edited with any DBF editor including
spreadsheets. Other new features include: a looped pipe network awareness; wind handling abilities;
drip subsurface command functions; mainline hydraulic calculations; pipe fitting placement; pipe editing
tools; QTO linkage and improved distribution analysis.

Figure 5-22 Irrigation Design Menu

Irrigation Design Menu Definitions

Option Function
Heads This menu contains commands for the placement and manipulation of sprinkler heads in a design.
Included are single, arrayed and edge placement methods. Coverage commands are also included here,
as are distribution and elevation utilities.
Zones The Zones menu contains all of the tools related to identifying or querying groups of sprinklers that are run
from the same valve.

Chapter 5: Products 143

 Irrigation Design Menu Definitions
Option Function
Pipe The Pipe menu allows you to lay out pipe, including lateral and mainline scenarios. Labeling and edit
features are also accessed here.
Drip The Drip menu contains commands related to designing both traditional drip systems with emitters and
spaghetti tubing intended to water individual plants, as well as subsurface drip systems used for covering
areas.
Symbols The Symbols menu is used to locate irrigation equipment symbols that are not otherwise accounted for in
an irrigation design. Symbols such as sprinkler heads, valves, etc. that are located elsewhere are not
duplicated here. However, symbols such as filters, backflow preventers and detail components are
available from this menu. User-defined sprinkler symbols is a new feature to this module and the creation
of those symbols can be found in this menu selection. The creating of a symbols table or legend is also
accomplished by using the commands on this menu.
Tools The Tools menu allows you to add details, edit existing sections, and create special features of contour
maps. Some of the Tools commands include Hatchure, Insert Border, and Lines.

Figure 5-23 Irrigation Design Tool Bar

Irrigation Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Configure Heads Irrigation Design → Heads → Configuration

Auto Locate Heads Irrigation Design → Heads → Auto Locate

Edge Locate Irrigation Design → Heads → Locate on Edge

Array Locate Irrigation Design → Heads → Locate by Array

Locate Single Irrigation Design → Heads → Locate Single

Pipe and Label Irrigation Design → Pipe → Pipe/Label Configuration

Configuration

Draw Lateral Irrigation Design → Pipe → Draw Lateral

Draw Mainline Irrigation Design → Pipe → Draw Mainline

Auto Pipe Layout Irrigation Design → Pipe → Auto Pipe Layout

Auto Size Laterals Irrigation Design → Pipe → Auto Size Laterals

Auto Size Mainlines Irrigation Design → Pipe → Auto Size Mainlines

Create Jumpline Irrigation Design → Pipe → Jumpline

Subsurface Area Irrigation Design → Drip → Subsurface

Locate Emitter Irrigation Design → Drip → Emitter Location

144 Eagle Point Menu

 Irrigation Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Drip Area Irrigation Design → Drip → Area

Landscape Design
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! LANDSCAPE DESIG N

KEY-IN COMMAND: ld

ICON:
This product allows you to create planting plans. You can insert plant symbols, link to Quantity
Takeoff, establish plant mixes and tables, conduct growth simulation, vegetation lines, etc.
New functionality includes converting plant tables between the name and alias, allowing plant tables to
be even more flexible by using wither tags or an option to include both the common and the scientific
name on the same label. The software also allows you to draw circles on a specified layer, then come
back and convert all these circles into plant blocks that can be identified when using the Label
command. Plant mixes have been updated to include functionality requested by our clients in the
United Kingdom.

Figure 5-24 Landscape Design Menu

Landscape Design Menu Definitions

Option Function
Illustrate This menu is used to provide graphical enhancements to a landscaping planting plan. These include such
items as edge stipple, tree shadows, plant outlines and vegetation lines.
Locate The Locate commands allow you to place various plants into your CAD graphic.
Alterations The Alterations commands assist you in taking design concepts and altering them to become final design

Chapter 5: Products
documents or performing “what if” scenarios.
Materials The Materials commands allow you to identify what plants are placed where on your CAD graphic. This
may associate a symbol to a plant name, either by labeling the symbol on your CAD graphic or by editing
the associated information, creating a plant table or legend, identifying plant mixes for large areas or
modifying the plant lists.
Tools The Tools menu allows you to add details, edit existing sections, and create special features of contour
maps. Some of the Tools commands include Hatchure, Insert Border and Lines.

Figure 5-25 Landscape Design Tool Bar

Landscape Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Create Vegetation Landscape Design → Illustrate → Vegetation Line
Line

Chapter 5: Products 145

 Landscape Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Outline a group of Landscape Design → Illustrate → Plant Outline
plants

Tree Shadows Landscape Design → Illustrate → Tree Shadows

Edge Stipple Landscape Design → Illustrate → Edge Stipple

Broadleaf Landscape Design → Locate → Broadleaf

Conifer Landscape Design → Locate → Conifer

Palm Cactus Landscape Design → Locate → Palm/Cactus

Shrub Landscape Design → Locate → Shrubs

Flowers Landscape Design → Locate → Flowers

Convert Plant Landscape Design → Alterations → Convert to Plant

Modify Plant Landscape Design → Alterations → Modify Plant Attributes

Tree Harvest Landscape Design → Alterations → Tree Harvest

Plant Growth Landscape Design → Alterations → Plant Growth

Plant Palette Landscape Design → Materials → Plant Palette

Plant Label Landscape Design → Materials → Label Symbol

Edit Labels Landscape Design → Materials → Edit Labels

Plant Mix Landscape Design → Materials → Plant Mix

Plant Table Landscape Design → Materials → Plant Table

Plant Database Landscape Design → Materials → Launch Database

146 Eagle Point Menu

Plant Database
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! PLANT DATABASE

KEY-IN COMMAND: pd

ICON:

Figure 5-26 Plant Database Menu

Plant Database Menu Definitions

Option Function
Data This menu allows you to display data, import and export data, print the database or a portion thereof and
exit the program.
View This allows you to display the tool bar and status bar as well as viewing the current selected plant’s
database information.
Records This allows you to add, purge and recover various items from the database. It also allows you to perform
sorts in ascending and descending order.
Browse This allows you to conduct searches of the current database based on name or description information.
CAD Link This allows you to utilize a direct link to the drawing to insert and query selected plant material.

Figure 5-27 Plant Database Tool Bar

Plant Database Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Open plant database Plant Database ! Data ! Display

Chapter 5: Products
Print the Document Plant Database ! Data ! Print

Display record information Plant Database ! View ! Record Information

Purge deleted records from Plant Database ! Records ! Purge

database

Search database Plant Database ! Browse ! Find

Show selected records only Plant Database ! Browse ! Show Selected

Show plants in CAD Plant Database ! CAD Link ! Show Plants

Chapter 5: Products 147

 Plant Database Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Find selected plant’s records Plant Database ! CAD Link ! Find Plant Records
in database

Profiles
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! PROFILES

KEY-IN COMMAND: eppr

ICON:
Profiles allows you to create a profile of the natural or proposed ground and place that profile into your
plan drawing. You can also work with profiles created in RoadCalc™. The product allows you to draft in
tangents, vertical curves, manholes, pipes, headwalls, flared end sections and wingwalls. You also
have the ability to annotate these items and place a grid around the whole profile. There are also query
functions that allow you to check sight distance on a vertical curve and the station and elevation of a
point on the profile.

Figure 5-28 Profiles Menu

Profiles Menu Definitions

Option Function
Setup This is where you can set up the profile coordinate system (PCS). This is a user coordinate system used
for working with the profile. You can create multiple PCS’s in a plan drawing.
Construct You can extract profiles from a surface model or from a 3-D object using commands under this menu. This
is also where you can create a grid for the profile.
Draw This menu contains the commands for drawing tangents, vertical curves, manholes, pipes, flared end
sections, headwalls and wingwalls.
Annotate The commands in this menu allow you to annotate the various objects of the profile.
Query Here you can query the profile for information including: station/elevation of a point, sight distance and
station/elevation information on a vertical curve, station/elevation data and percent grade information for a
tangent, as well as station/elevation information of manholes/headwalls/wingwalls/flared end sections.

Figure 5-29 Profiles Tool Bar

Profiles Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Profile Coordinate System Profiles → Setup → Profile Coordinate System

Setup Annotation Settings Profiles → Setup → Annotation Settings

148 Eagle Point Menu

 Profiles Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Construct Grid Profiles → Construct → Grid

Profile from Surface Model Profiles → Construct → Profile from Surface Model

Profile from Object Profiles → Construct → Profile from Object

Draw Pipes Profiles → Draw → Pipes

Draw Pipe Structure to Structure Profiles → Draw → Pipe Structure to Structure

Annotate Point/Grade Break Profiles → Annotate → Point/Grade Break

Query Point Profiles → Query → Point

Query Tangent Profiles → Query → Tangent

Query Vertical Curve Profiles → Query → Vertical Curve

Query Inlet/Manhole Profiles → Query → Inlet/Manhole

Quantity Takeoff
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! QUANTITY TAKEOFF

KEY-IN COMMAND: epqt

Chapter 5: Products
ICON:
Quantity Takeoff allows you to calculate quantities and create bill of materials reports. The database
with item IDs is customizeable, allowing you to create new entries, modify or delete existing entries.
You can assign objects with item IDs, modify item IDs, display all objects that are assigned with an item
ID and display all objects that do not have an item ID assigned to them.

Figure 5-30 Quantity Takeoff Menu

Quantity Takeoff Menu Definitions

Option Function
Database This allows you to view the listing of all item IDs that are available for each Construction Specification
Institute (C.S.I.) group. You can also create new item IDs, modify or delete existing item IDs.
Item ID This allows you to assign item IDs to objects by the following methods: object, linear, block/cell, area,
volume and layer/level. You can also modify or remove an item ID that is assigned to an object.
Calculate This allows you to calculate the quantities of the objects that are assigned with an item ID. Also, you can
view the bill of materials list for all of the quantities that were calculated.

Chapter 5: Products 149

 Quantity Takeoff Menu Definitions
Option Function
Display This allows you to display all of the objects that have an item ID assigned to them or to display all of the
objects that do not have an item ID assigned to them.

Figure 5-31 Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar

Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Database Quantity Takeoff → Database → Manage

Assign by Object Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Object

Assign by Linear Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Linear

Assign by Block/Cell Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Block/Cell

Assign by Area Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Area

Assign by Volume Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Volume

Assign by Layer/Level Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Assign by Layer/Level

Modify Item ID Quantity Takeoff → Item ID → Modify Item ID

Calculate Quantities Quantity Takeoff → Calculate → Quantities

Bill of Materials Quantity Takeoff → Calculate → Bill of Materials

Display Objects Quantity Takeoff → Display → Objects

RoadCalc
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! ROADCALC

KEY-IN COMMAND: eprc

ICON:
RoadCalc™ is a computer software package with roadway design, earthwork computation and drafting
capabilities. It is an interactive tool providing speed, accuracy and economy of roadway design. The

150 Eagle Point Menu

methods employed by RoadCalc™ for roadway design are derived from conventional design.
However, full advantage is taken of the speed, accuracy and iterative capacity of the computer.

Figure 5-32 RoadCalc Menu

RoadCalc Menu Definitions

Option Function
Alignments Enter the horizontal alignment information using the commands on the Alignments menu. The alignment
information is used by RoadCalc™ from which to base the stationing of the design. Special or secondary
alignments may also be entered to control other horizontal elements of the design dynamically when
RoadCalc™ processes the cross-sections. This is also where utilities get defined.
Cross-Sections Once the horizontal alignment geometry is entered, you may extract cross-sectional information from
surface models or enter shot information using the commands located in this menu.
Profiles The vertical alignment information is entered using commands from the Profiles menu. Vertical Points of
Intersection (or VPIs) are entered by typing station/elevation or grade/distance pairs. You may also enter
profile information by constructing the profile graphic in CAD and converting it into a design profile.
Typical Sections The Typical Section menu provides access to commands needed to construct the design cross-section
information. Once typical sections are defined, they are processed onto the original ground cross-sections
utilizing the design geometry entered here as well as in the Alignments, Cross-Sections and Profiles
menus.
Process The commands located here are used to establish the design criteria that RoadCalc™ follows when
processing the typical sections onto original ground. The slope treatments and the logic used to apply
them to the design are entered using the commands found on the Process menu.
Output Graphic and numeric printout information may be obtained using commands found on the Output menu. It
is broken up into two categories: Graphics and Printouts. The commands listed under Graphics are used
to produce various plot sheets as well as other design elements in the CAD graphic. The commands listed
under Printouts produce reports to dialog boxes and to your Windows system printer.

Figure 5-33 RoadCalc Tool Bar

RoadCalc Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Chapter 5: Products
Edit Alignment Data RoadCalc → Alignments → Edit Data

Convert Objects to Alignment RoadCalc → Alignments → Convert Objects to Alignment

View Alignment Graphics RoadCalc → Alignments → View Alignment Graphics

Synchronize Alignment RoadCalc → Alignments → Synchronize Graphics and Data

Graphics and Data

Edit Cross-Section Data RoadCalc → Cross-Sections → Edit Cross-Section Data

View Cross-Section Graphic RoadCalc → Cross-Sections → View Cross-Section Graphic

Chapter 5: Products 151

 RoadCalc Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Synchronize Cross-Section RoadCalc → Cross-Sections → Synchronize Graphics and Data
Graphics and Data

Edit Profile Data RoadCalc → Profiles → Edit Data

View Profile Graphic RoadCalc → Profiles → View Profile Graphic

Synchronize Profile Graphics RoadCalc → Profiles → Synchronize Graphics and Data

and Data

Construct Typical Section RoadCalc → Typical Sections → Construct Typical Section Data

View Typical Section Graphic RoadCalc → Typical Sections → View Typical Section Graphic

Run Design RoadCalc → Process → Run Design

Cross-Section Sheets RoadCalc → Output → Cross-Section Sheets

Plan and Profile Sheets RoadCalc → Output → Plan and Profile Sheets

Volumes RoadCalc → Output → Volumes

Sanitary Sewers
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! SANITARY SEWERS

KEY-IN COMMAND: epss

ICON:
Sanitary Sewers models complex networks in full and/or partial flow conditions. It has full design
capabilities that size pipes and set invert elevations for gravity lines and hydraulically models lift
stations with multiple pumps. You can specify design flows through land use analysis and/or by entering
flows including infiltration rates and peak flow factors. You can model new and/or existing sewer
systems and compute the hydraulic grade line (HGL) for each line.
Sanitary Sewers allows you to design new systems or analyze existing systems. When adding new
pipes to your network, you can specify design constraints including pipe size, minimum velocity,

152 Eagle Point Menu

minimum depth of cover, minimum slopes and invert elevations. Once the network is designed, you can
create plots of pump curves, system curves and plan and profile sheets.

Figure 5-34 Sanitary Sewers Menu

Sanitary Sewers Menu Definitions

Option Function
Network The Network menu allows you to create libraries of structures, pumps and pipes to be used in the network.
It also allows you to place the outfall and the sewer network according to the settings specified. Once the
network is created, you can extract ground profiles for your network.
Edit The Edit menu allows you to make any desired changes to the junctions and pipes of your Network. You
can enter the flows for each pipe or specify that the pipe is a forcemain and apply pumps. There is also a
global edit command that allows you to make changes to multiple pipes at the same time instead of on an
individual basis.
Calculation The Calculation menu allows you to enter the different design settings that are used to size your pipes and
design your invert elevations. You can specify flow ratios for Residential, Commercial and Miscellaneous
as well as flow profiles to used for the calculation. Once the calculations have been performed, you can
view a summary or detailed report.
Output The Output menu provides tools to create pump curves, system curves and plan and profile sheets. You
can also create custom reports for the input data and calculated data for the sewer network.

Figure 5-35 Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar

Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Locate Outfall Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Locate Outfall

Create Network Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Create Network

Chapter 5: Products
Modify Network Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Modify Network

Network Settings Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Settings

Edit Junctions Sanitary Sewers ! Edit ! Junctions

Edit Pipes Sanitary Sewers ! Edit ! Pipes

Edit Flows/ Sanitary Sewers ! Edit ! Flows/Forcemains

Forcemains

Global Edit Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Global Edit

Pump Library Sanitary Sewers ! Network ! Pump Library

Chapter 5: Products 153

 Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Design Settings Sanitary Sewers ! Calculation ! Design Settings

Calculate Sanitary Sewers ! Calculation ! Calculate

Custom Reports Sanitary Sewers ! Output ! Custom Reports

Site Design
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! S ITE DESIG N

KEY-IN COMMAND: epsd

ICON:
Site Design allows you to project cut and fill slopes to a surface model, calculate volumes between
surface models, balance cut and fill volumes between surface models and create sub-strata surface
models. You can analyze slopes, create slope contours and create flowlines for a surface model. You
can also create depth contours, depth grid stakes and depth spot stakes to be used for staking
purposes.

Figure 5-36 Site Design Menu

Site Design Menu Definitions

Option Function
Layout This allows you to create feature lines, assign grades to objects and create 3-D offsets to help develop
your site.
Project Slopes This allows you to project slopes from an object to a surface model, catchline, or an offset and then tie to a
surface model. It also allows you to transition from one slope to another slope along an object or around a
corner.
Volumes This allows you to calculate volumes between surface models and to balance volumes between surface
models.
Slopes This allows you to analyze the slope of the surface model, create flowlines and slope contours place flow
hatchures on contours and annotate the slope contours. You can also calculate the grade and distances
between points.
Depths This allows you to place depth grid and spot stakes between surface models. You can also create depth
contours and annotate the contours.
Soil Borings This allows you to place sub-surface Nodes to be used for soil boring surface models, import and export
soil boring data and to display a depth of material sheet for the soil boring Node.

Figure 5-37 Site Design Tool Bar

154 Eagle Point Menu

Site Design Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Interpolate Additional Site Design → Layout → Interpolate Additional Geometry
Geometry

Track Coordinates Site Design → Layout → Track Coordinates

3D Offset Site Design → Layout → 3-D Offset

Assign Grade to Object Site Design → Layout → Assign Grade to Object

Project Plan Objects Site Design → Layout → Project Plan Objects

Make Slope Projections to Site Design → Project Slopes → Make to Surface Model
Surface Model

Make Slope Projections to Site Design → Project Slopes → Make to Catchline

Catchline

Make Slope Projections to Site Design → Project Slopes → Make to Offset

Offset

Calculate Prismoidal Site Design → Volumes → Calculate Prismoidal

Volumes

Balance Volumes Site Design → Volumes → Balance

Analyze Slopes Site Design → Slopes → Analyze

Make Flowlines Site Design → Slopes → Make Flowlines

Make Intermediate and Index Site Design → Slopes → Make Intermediate and Index Contours
Slope Contours

Annotate Slope Contours Site Design → Slopes → Annotate Contours

Chapter 5: Products
Place Spot Depth Stakes Site Design → Depths → Place Spot Stakes

Place Grid Depth Stakes Site Design → Depths → Place Grid Stakes

Make Intermediate and Index Site Design → Depth → Make Intermediate and Index Contours
Depth Contours

Annotate Depth Contours Site Design → Depth → Annotate Contours

Edit Soil Boring Data Site Design → Soil Borings → Edit Data

Make Soil Boring Surface Site Design → Soil Borings → Make Surface Models
Models

Chapter 5: Products 155

Site Planning
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! SITE PLANNING

KEY-IN COMMAND: sp

ICON:
The function of Site Planning is to provide a set of tools that professional landscape architects can use
in setting up and designing elements for a site plan (for example, sidewalks, retaining walls, building
footprints, etc.). Site Planning is organized into pull-down menus and icons. The icons are shortcuts to
commonly used functions in the menus.

Figure 5-38 Site Planning Menu

Site Planning Menu Definitions

Option Function
Building The commands on the Building menu allow you to create building footprints, roofs, openings, houses,
frames and panels.
Circulation The Circulation commands allow you to create roads, sidewalks and parking lots, and insert vehicles,
people, patios, ramps, steps, map symbols, fences and railings and landscape walls into your CAD
graphic.
Hardscape The commands on the Hardscape menu allow you to insert symbols such as benches, flags, lights,
playground equipment, rocks, signs, furniture, transmission lines, trash and utilities into your CAD
graphic.
Recreation The commands on the Recreation menu allow you to design recreation facilities and insert appropriate
symbols.
Tools The Tools menu allows you to add details, edit existing sections, and create special features of contour
maps. Some of the Tools commands include Hatchure, Insert Border and Lines.

Figure 5-39 Site Planning Tool Bar

Site Planning Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Footprint Site Planning → Building → Footprint

Opening Site Planning → Building → Openings

Roof Site Planning → Building → Roofs

Roads and Sidewalks Site Planning → Circulation → Roads and Sidewalks

Linear Parking Site Planning → Circulation → Linear Parking

Curved Parking Site Planning → Circulation → Curved Parking

156 Eagle Point Menu

 Site Planning Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Area Parking Site Planning → Circulation → Area Parking

Patio Site Planning → Circulation → Patios

Ramps Site Planning → Circulation → Ramps

Steps Site Planning → Circulation → Steps

Fences and Railings Site Planning → Circulation → Fences and Railings

Landscape Walls Site Planning → Circulation → Landscape Walls

Transmission Lines Site Planning → Hardscape → Transmission Lines

Fairway Routing Site Planning → Recreation → Fairway Routing

Course Table Site Planning → Recreation → Course Table

Golf Symbols Site Planning → Recreation → Golf Symbols

Storm Sewers
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! STORM S EWERS

KEY-IN COMMAND: epst

Chapter 5: Products
ICON:
Storm Sewers computes the hydraulic grade line for non-uniform flow and allows you to design and
analyze any new or existing storm sewer system. Storm Sewers first determines the flow rate in each
sewer in the network, starting from the most upstream point to the terminal drainage point and then
performs a standard step hydraulic analysis on the sewer network starting from the downstream point
and working in an upstream direction. Storm Sewers also provides for inlet analysis and design
throughout the sewer network.
Storm Sewers allows you to design new systems or analyze existing systems. When adding new pipes
to your network, you can specify design constraints including pipe size, minimum velocity, minimum
depth of cover, minimum slopes and invert elevations. Once the network is designed, you can create
plots of Intensity Duration Frequency (IDF) curves and plan and profile sheets.

Figure 5-40 Storm Sewers Menu

Chapter 5: Products 157

 Storm Sewers Menu Definitions
Option Function
Network The Network menu allows you to create libraries of structures, inlets and pipes to be used in the network.
It also allows you to place the outfall and the sewer network according to the settings specified. Once the
network is created, you can extract ground profiles for your network.
Edit The Edit menu allows you to make any desired changes to the junctions and pipes of your network and
enter the flows for each pipe. There is also a Global Edit command that allows you to make changes to
multiple pipes at the same time instead of on an individual basis.
Rainfall The Rainfall menu contains commands to create libraries of different rainfall data. You can create different
rainfall for Eastern/Central, Western, Tabular and Custom. You can also view a map of rainfall data to
determine the rainfall.
Calculation The Calculation menu allows you to enter the different design settings used to size your pipes and design
your invert elevations. Once the calculations have been performed, you can view a summary or detailed
report.
Output The Output menu provides tools to create Intensity Duration Frequency (IDF) curves and plan and profile
sheets. You can also create custom reports for the input data and calculated data for the sewer network.

Figure 5-41 Storm Sewers Tool Bar

Storm Sewers Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Locate Outfall Storm Sewers → Network → Locate Outfall

Create Network Storm Sewers → Network → Create Network

Modify Network Storm Sewers → Network → Modify Network

Network Settings Storm Sewers → Network → Settings

Edit Junctions Storm Sewers → Edit → Junctions

Edit Pipes Storm Sewers → Edit → Pipes

Edit Flows Storm Sewers → Edit → Flows

Global Edit Storm Sewers → Edit → Global Edit

Rainfall Library Storm Sewers → Rainfall → Library

Design Settings Storm Sewers → Calculation → Design Settings

Calculate Storm Sewers → Calculation → Calculate

158 Eagle Point Menu

 Storm Sewers Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Custom Reports Stom Sewers → Output → Custom Reports

Surface Modeling
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! SURFACE M ODELING

KEY-IN COMMAND: epsm

ICON:
Surface Modeling allows you to create a surface model from topographical information such as points,
breaklines or aerial contours. From this surface model, you can create contours, annotate contours,
create rectangular grids and place spot elevations. You can also merge two or more surface models
together and digitize contour lines from site plans.

Figure 5-42 Surface Modeling Menu

Surface Modeling Menu Definitions

Option Function
Prepare This allows you to manage surface models, import and export points and breaklines, check for crossing
breaklines and define boundaries and void regions that are used when creating surface models. It also
allows you to batch operations together such as creating a surface model, creating contours and creating
rectangular grids.
Construct This allows you to create feature lines, digitize contours and mask objects. You can also weed and densify
objects that are used when creating a surface model.
Triangulate This allows you to create surface models, track coordinates on the models and merge surface models
together.

Chapter 5: Products
Edit Model This allows you to modify the surface model that has been created. You can modify the model by deleting
triangles, changing point or triangle elevations, adding points, inserting breaklines and switching the
diagonals.
Contours This allows you to preview or create intermediate, index and user-defined contours. It also allows you to
annotate the contours that have been created.
Output This allows you to place spot and grid elevations, grids, triangles, breaklines, boundaries and void regions
into the CAD graphics. You can also print information about surface models and crossing breaklines.

Figure 5-43 Surface Modeling Tool Bar

Surface Modeling Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Surface Models Surface Modeling → Prepare → Manage Surface Models

Chapter 5: Products 159

 Surface Modeling Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Crossing Breaklines Surface Modeling → Prepare → Crossing Breaklines

Batch Operations Surface Modeling → Prepare → Batch Operations

Mask Objects Surface Modeling → Construct → Mask Objects

Triangulate Surface Model Surface Modeling → Triangulate → Surface Model

Triangulate Surface Model Surface Modeling → Triangulate → Surface Model from Contours
from Contours

Merge Surface Models Surface Modeling → Triangulate → Merged Surface Models

Track Coordinates Surface Modeling → Triangulate → Track Coordinates

Make Intermediate and Surface Modeling → Contours → Make Intermediate & Index
Indexed Contours

Preview Contours Surface Modeling → Contours → Preview

Annotate Contours Surface Modeling → Contours → Annotate

Make User-Defined Surface Modeling → Contours → Make User-Defined

Contours

Place Spot Elevations Surface Modeling → Output → Place Spot Elevation Labels

Place Rectangular Grid Surface Modeling → Output → Place Grid

Place Triangles Surface Modeling → Output → Place Triangles

Survey Adjustment
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! S URVEY A DJUSTM ENT

KEY-IN COMMAND: epsa

ICON:
Survey Adjustment uses several methods to perform closures on surveyed information. Angle
balances and adjustments, including the Least Squares method of adjustment, may be used to make
corrections to both traverse and side shot information. This information may be read from a Data
Collection file, a COGO batch file, an Eagle Point SDMS file or by creating a file by selecting objects
and/or Nodes directly from the CAD graphic. Reports may be generated for the adjusted and

160 Eagle Point Menu

unadjusted traverse and side shot legs that may include directions, angles, error ellipses, Chi square
test results and the Least Square residuals.

Figure 5-44 Survey Adjustment Menu

Survey Adjustment Menu Definitions

Option Function
Prepare This allows you to create a Survey Adjustment file using a Data Collection file, a COGO batch file, an
Eagle Point SDMS file, or by creating a file by selecting objects and/or Nodes directly from the CAD
graphic. You may edit the file for any errors before processing or generating reports.
Entry This allows you to build the adjustment file by entering a range of Nodes, or graphically selecting objects
and/or Nodes from the CAD graphic.
Compute This allows you to process the adjustment, compare the unadjusted survey to the adjusted survey, show
error ellipses, update graphics and print detailed reports.

Figure 5-45 Survey Adjustment Tool Bar

Chapter 5: Products

Chapter 5: Products 161

 Survey Adjustment Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Files Survey Adjustment → Prepare → Manage Files

Edit Active File Survey Adjustment → Prepare → Edit Active File

Settings Survey Adjustment → Prepare → Settings

Entry by Nodes Survey Adjustment → Entry → By Nodes

Entry by Object Survey Adjustment → Entry → By Object

Compute Adjustment Survey Adjustment → Compute → Adjustment

Show Error Ellipses Survey Adjustment → Compute → Show Error Ellipses

Erase Error Ellipses Survey Adjustment → Compute → Erase Error Ellipses

Chi Square Test Survey Adjustment → Compute → Chi Square Test

Water Surface Profiling

EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! W ATER S URFACE PROFILING

KEY-IN COMMAND: epwp

ICON:
The Water Surface Profiling product allows you to create a stream alignment and cross-sections. The
stream alignment can be graphically converted from objects in CAD. You can also define the Overbank
alignments. The overbank alignments are used to denote the overbank points on the cross-sections.
The cross-sections can be directly entered in the dialog box or extracted from a surface model. You can
also directly extract the cross-sections from the drawing/design file. This data can then be exported to
HEC-RAS so the river can be modeled hydraulically. HEC-RAS allows you to do complete modeling of
a river or stream channel including culverts, bridges, multiple openings, weirs, and spillways. Once the
data has been processed in HEC-RAS, you can import the Water Surface Profile and Floodplain
information back into Eagle Point where they can be plotted in CAD.

Figure 5-46 Water Surface Profiling Menu

162 Eagle Point Menu

Water Surface Profiling Menu Definitions
Option Function
Alignments In this menu you define the stream and cross-section alignments for a particular reach. The alignments
can be defined by directly entering the data into a dialog box editor, or you can convert graphically objects
in CAD to an alignment. This menu also allows you to define utilities which are 3-D objects in CAD. These
objects are shown in the cross-section editor as well as in the profile drawing.
Cross-Sections All of the cross-section data can be entered in the Cross-sections menu. You can directly enter the cross-
section data in the Edit Data dialog box or extract the cross-section from a surface model (DTM). There is
also an option to import cross-sectional data from an ASCII file.
Transfer Once the alignment and cross-section data has been defined, you can export the data to a file so it can be
imported into HEC-RAS. The Transfer menu is where you go to transfer data to HEC-RAS and back into
Eagle Point.
Output Once the data has been edited in HEC-RAS, computations run and imported back from HEC-RAS, the
commands in the Output menu allow you to create some output. Here you can create Water Surface
Profiles in CAD and generate floodplain delineations in CAD as well. You can also define a sub-project
prototype so that all of the settings are saved to a prototype name. This allows you to avoid having to set
all of the settings every time a project/subproject is started.

Figure 5-47 Water Surface Profiling Tool Bar

Water Surface Profiling Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Edit Alignment Data Water Surface Profiling ! Alignments ! Edit Data

Convert Objects to Stream Water Surface Profiling ! Alignments ! Convert Object to Stream Alignment
Alignment

View Plan Graphics Water Surface Profiling ! Alignments ! View Plan Graphics

Edit Cross-Section Data Water Surface Profiling ! Cross-Sections ! Edit Data

Chapter 5: Products
View Cross-Section Graphics Water Surface Profiling ! Cross-Sections ! View Cross-Section Graphics

Export to HEC-RAS Water Surface Profiling ! Transfer ! Export to HEC-RAS

Import from HEC-RAS Water Surface Profiling ! Transfer ! Import from HEC-RAS

View Water Surface Profiles Water Surface Profiling ! Output ! Water Surface Profiles

Delineate Floodplain Water Surface Profiling ! Output ! Delineate Floodplain

Chapter 5: Products 163

Watershed Modeling
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! W ATERSHED M ODELING

KEY-IN COMMAND: epwm

ICON:
The Watershed Modeling module is a comprehensive drainage program that determines runoffs using
industry-standard techniques (SCS, TR-20, and TR-55). Model flood control structures, such as
detention basins with various outlet structures. Create Unit and Flood hydrographs using actual or
synthetic rainfall distributions. Then combine or route hydrographs to evaluate drainage needs and
designs within an Eagle Point project. Additionally, tools are provided that allow you to create Stage/
Discharge rating curves for various outlet structures (culverts, weirs, etc.).

Figure 5-48 Watershed Modeling Menu

Watershed Modeling Menu Definitions

Option Function
Watersheds The commands found in the Watersheds menu provide the capabilities to define sub-basin and watershed
areas. In addition to the Sub-basin and Watershed Managers, there are commands to assist you in
creating the sub-basins, whether they are drawn by hand or if they are defined by surface terrain.
Land Uses The commands found in the Land Uses menu provide the capabilities to define land use areas and
groupings of land uses. In addition to the Land Use and Land Use Group Managers, there are commands
to assist you in creating the land uses.
Rainfall The Rainfall menu contains commands to create libraries of different rainfall data. You can create different
rainfall for Eastern/Central, Western, Tabular, and Custom. You can also view a map of rainfall data to
determine the rainfall.
Hydrograph The Hydrograph menu provides access to the two hydrograph managers and to some of the Edit
Hydrograph commands. The Routing menu contains the remaining hydrograph editing commands. Also
contained in this menu is the Scenario Manager, which controls your active scenario.
Detention The Detention menu provides access to the commands that assist you in designing outlet structures and
storage reservoirs.
Routing The commands in the Routing menu provide the tools for evaluating and creating hydrographs that flow
through a channel or reservoir.
Output Watershed Modeling provides a variety of printouts and graphics to aid you in working on your watershed
project. You can graphically view all unit hydrographs, flood hydrographs, IDF curves, stage/storage,
stage/discharge, and storage/discharge curves for reservoirs and outlet structures. The plan view of a
watershed with watershed and land use boundaries, as well as contours, can be plotted using the CAD
program. You can also print reports of the information calculated by Watershed Modeling. The reports,
which are in tabular form, can be directly used in final project reports. The printouts can print to either the
default Windows printer or to a file.

Figure 5-49 Watershed Modeling Tool Bar

164 Eagle Point Menu

 Watershed Modeling Tool Bar Icons

Icon Name Menu Path

Manage Sub-basins Watershed Modeling ! Watersheds ! Manage Sub-basins

Manage Watershed Modeling ! Watersheds ! Manage Watersheds

Watersheds

Manage Land Uses Watershed Modeling ! Land Uses ! Manage Land Uses

Manage Land Use Watershed Modeling ! Land Uses ! Manage Land Use Groups
Groups

Rainfall Library Watershed Modeling ! Rainfall ! Library

Manage Scenarios Watershed Modeling ! Hydrograph ! Manage Scenarios

Manage Unit Watershed Modeling ! Hydrograph ! Manage Unit Hydrographs

Hydrographs

Manage Watershed Modeling ! Hydrograph ! Manage Hydrographs

Hydrographs

Manage Outlet Watershed Modeling ! Detention ! Manage Outlet Structures

Structures

Manage Reservoirs Watershed Modeling ! Detention ! Manage Reservoirs

Edit Channel Watershed Modeling ! Routing ! Channel: Edit Convex

Routing - Convex

Edit Reservoir Watershed Modeling ! Routing ! Reservoir: Edit Storage Indication

Routing - Storage

Chapter 5: Products
Indication

Graph Hydrographs Watershed Modeling ! Output ! Graphics: Hydrographs

Summary Printout Watershed Modeling ! Output ! Printouts: Summary

More Products
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! M ORE

KEY-IN COMMAND: more

The More command allows you to select a purchased product. The Products menu contains a limited
number of products. If you have purchased a product and it does not display on the Products menu,
you can select it from the More Products dialog box (Figure 5-50 on page 166).

Chapter 5: Products 165

" If you have purchased a product and it does not display on the Products menu, you can customize the
menu using the Customize Menu command (below). This command allows you to change the order of
products on this menu and also allows you to choose which products are to be displayed on this menu.

Figure 5-50 More Products Dialog Box

More Products Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Products List This lists all of the products that have been purchased. Highlight the product and click on OK, or double-
click on the product to open it.

Customize Menu
EAG LE POINT ! PRODUCTS ! CUSTOM IZE M ENU

KEY-IN COMMAND: custmenu

The Customize Menu command allows you to change the order of products and what products display
in the Products menu. There is a limited number of products displayed in this menu. This command
also allows you to indicate whether or not you want the tool bar for each product displayed. Before
toggling off the tool bar, the product should be opened and the tool bar detached. This prevents the
product from being opened with a blank tool bar attached to the menu.

Figure 5-51 Customize Menu Dialog Box

Customize Menu Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
Tool bar/ This displays the list of products that display on the Products menu. This is also the order in
Products Menu which they display. If there is an x in the box before the product, the product tool bar also
displays. If there is not an x in the box, the Products tool bar is not displayed. Only the name is
displayed.
Default This resets the Products menu back to alphabetical order and places all installed products (up to
17) back into the menu.

166 Eagle Point Menu

 Customize Menu Dialog Box Definitions
Option Icon Function
Move Product This moves the highlighted product up in the Products menu.
Up

Move Product This moves the highlighted product down in the Products menu.
Down

Append This adds the installed product that is highlighted in the Remaining Products list to the bottom of
the Products Menu list. This also removes the product from the Remaining Products list.
Insert This adds the installed product that is highlighted in the Remaining Products list to the location
above the highlighted product in the Products Menu list. This also removes the product from the
Remaining Products list.
Remove This removes the highlighted item from the Products Menu list and places it into the Remaining
Products list.
Remaining This displays all of the products that have been installed but does not display on the Products
Products menu.

QuickSteps
To turn a tool bar off so it is not displayed, complete the following steps:
1. Select the product from the Products menu for which you do not want to display the tool
bar.
2. Detach the tool bar from the menu by clicking and holding your primary button on your
pointing device on a blank location of the tool bar.
3. Drag the tool bar away from the menu until the outline around the tool bar changes size.
4. Release the primary button of your pointing device.
The tool bar is separated from the menu.
5. Select Products ! Customize Menu.
The Customize Menu dialog box (Figure 5-51 on page 166) displays.
6. Click on the check box next to the product from which you removed the tool bar.
7. Click on OK to close the Customize Menu dialog box and save your changes.
The next time that the product is selected from the Products menu only the menu is displayed. The

Chapter 5: Products
tool bar is not displayed until it is toggled back on in the Customize Menu dialog box.

Check-out/Return License
EAG LE POINT M ENU ! PRODUCTS ! CHECK-OUT/RETURN LICENSE

KEY-IN COMMAND: eplm

$ This option is only available to users who are running the Eagle Point Network License
Manager.

When running Eagle Point using embedded CAD menus or by key-ins, a product license is checked out
when a command is running or when a dialog box is visible on screen. Simply canceling the command
or closing the dialog does not return a license to the License Manager. You must use the Check-out/
Return License command found in the Products menu in order to free the module license.

Chapter 5: Products 167

 The dialog box in this command shows you all of the products that you have checked out at that time in
the list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. The list on the right-hand side displays all of the product
licenses currently available. You can return a product license back to the manager by highlighting the
product in the left list and clicking on the Return button. This frees the license immediately and makes it
available for other users. You can also check out a license prior to actually selecting a command from
that product. Highlight a product in the right-hand side list and click on the Check-out button to “reserve”
a product prior to running a command in that module. The Update button refreshes the lists to show if
any additional licenses have been returned since the time the Check-out/Return License command was
executed. If you use the module menu palettes to run commands, the product licenses are returned
automatically when the menu palette is closed.

Figure 5-52 Check-out/Return License Dialog Box

Check-out/Return License Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Products This list contains the module licenses that are currently checked out by you. To return a license, highlight
Checked Out the appropriate module and click on the Return button.
Products This list contains the module licenses that are available when the dialog box launches. Use the Update
Available button to query the license manager and refresh this list.
Check-out Use this button to proactively “reserve” a module license. Highlight a module in the Products Available list
and select the Check-out button. This license is checked out in your name until you use the Return button
or until you close that product’s Eagle Point menu palette.
Return Use this button when you want to return a module license to the license manager. Highlight a module in
the Products Checked Out list and click on the Return button.
Update Use this button to refresh the list of Products Available.

168 Eagle Point Menu

HELP
The Help menu allows you to view on-line help for processes of
completing a task and command help. Also, you can view the entire Eagle
CHAPTER
Point documentation.
In this chapter:
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Online Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring and Updating Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

6
About Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 6: Help 169

Contents
EAG LE POINT ! H ELP ! CONTENTS

KEY-IN COMMAND: helpcont

The Contents command in the Help menu allows you to view command-specific help. This displays the
standard Windows help dialog box with tab pages of Contents, Index and Find. You can select a
product and then an associated command by using the Contents Tab. You can type in a command
name on the Index tab to display the help for a specific topic. You can also use the Find tab to enter key
words if you do not know the name of the command of which you want help on.

Online Documentation
EAG LE POINT ! H ELP ! ONLINE DOCUM ENTATION

KEY-IN COMMAND: helponline

The Online Documentation command in the Help menu allows you to view the online version of the
Eagle Point manual. When the command is selected, a page is displayed containing all of the manuals
you can view. These include Eagle Point, Getting Started, Civil/Surveying Tutorial, all Civil/
Surveying manuals, LANDCADD™ Tutorial and all LANDCADD™ manuals. Once an item is selected,
the manual for the selected item is displayed. You can read the manual online or print sections or the
entire manual to review.
When the Eagle Point software is installed, the location of the online documentation is stored. If the
online documentation does not display when the command is selected from the menu, use the Eagle
Point Administrator command to configure the location. The Eagle Point Administrator can be found in
the Eagle Point program group or you can run the EPADMIN.EXE file from the \EGPT\PROGRAM
folder. Select Configure ! Eagle Point and specify the location for the on-line documentation in the
Documentation Folder Location edit field.
" This option requires the Adobe Acrobat Reader to be installed on your machine. If you have not
installed the Adobe Acrobat Reader on your machine, you can do so by browsing your Eagle Point CD
to the Adobe directory and run the AR32E30.EXE file.

Configuring and Updating Eagle Point

EAG LE POINT ! H ELP ! CONFIG URING AND UPDATING EAG LE POINT

The Configuring and Updating Eagle Point command displays the CONFIG.TXT file located in the
\EGPT\PROGRAM directory. This file contains the most up-to-date information on configuring Eagle
Point to run with the latest releases of the supported CAD packages.

170 Eagle Point Menu

About Eagle Point
EAG LE POINT ! HELP ! A BOUT EAG LE POINT

The About Eagle Point command allows you to view information such as version, installation type, and
copyright date. This information is useful to determine if you are running the most recent version of the
software. It is also useful for Eagle Point Technical Support to determine solutions to any questions or
problems.

Chapter 6: Help

Chapter 6: Help 171

172 Eagle Point Menu
EAGLE POINT
MENU GLOSSARY

OF

TE R M S
Additional CAD Graphic
Additional CAD graphic refers to additional drawing/design files that
are used in a project that are not the main project drawing. They can
contain other information that is referenced or used in conjunction with
the main project drawing. Subprojects can use an additional graphic as
their primary CAD file instead of the main project plan graphic.

Command Key-in
The Command Key-in is the Eagle Point key-in tool palette that allows
you to execute commands by typing in their command name and
pressing the Enter key. It remembers the last ten commands executed
and places them in a drop list. Every menu command in each Eagle
Point product has a key-in equivalent. See Appendix A of the Getting
Started manual for the list of command key-ins.

Data File Locations

Data files that Eagle Point software creates are placed here. By
default, when you add a project the data files are stored in the same
location as the project. You may however, use the Advanced button on
the New Project dialog box to set the Data File Location to be
somewhere other than in the project folder.

Default CAD Settings

CAD settings such as layer/level, color, linestyle and text style/font for
the objects that Eagle Point places into the CAD graphic may be
defined using the Default CAD Settings command found on the Eagle
Point menu under the System menu. When prototype settings are
saved, default CAD settings are saved within the prototype so that any
new projects may inherit these default CAD settings.

Eagle Point Menu

This is the menu that appears when starting the Eagle Point software.
It provides access to various project commands (New, Open, Units,
Formats, Node Library, etc.) and to the product menus. If the Eagle
Point menu is closed, all other product menus, tool bars and dialog
boxes are also closed. If it is minimized, all other product menus, tool
bars and dialog boxes are also minimized.

Glossary of Terms 173

 External Node Database
Node (point) information can be stored to an external database rather than having it placed into the
CAD graphic files. This database can then be attached to projects by multiple users so that survey
point information may be shared. Having an External Node Database for a project is optional.

Field Code
A Field Code is the Node identifier that controls what symbol and annotation is placed for a certain
point feature. Field Codes can be alphanumeric characters that represent a survey point feature.
Attributes, such as the symbol you want to see, the CAD properties (layer/level/color), the
annotation style and surface masking property, are saved to a Field Code. Libraries of Field Codes
can be established and used by all projects.

Intelligent Indexing
This is the process that Eagle Point uses to track and store the project data files and CAD graphics
files for you. Within the software you assign meaningful names or descriptions to items such as
projects, surface models, alignments, pipe networks, etc., so you don’t have to worry about where
the files are stored or what they are called. Eagle Point tracks that information for you.

Layer Groups
You can assign AutoCAD/BricsCad drawing layers to a group name for easy manipulation (On/Off,
Thaw/Freeze, Lock/Unlock). Layer groups are stored for the project and can be used in any drawing
within the project. If layer groups exist for a project and a prototype is made from that project, the
layer groups are copied into a new project using that prototype. If a group contains a layer that is not
in the current drawing, actions on that layer are ignored.

Level Groups
You can assign MicroStation design file levels to a group name for easy manipulation (On/Off). Level
groups are stored for the project and can be used in any design file within the project. If level groups
exist for a project and a prototype is made from that project, the level groups are copied into a new
project using that prototype.

Library
This is a generic term used to define a collection of items that are available to all projects (Node
Library, Speed Table Libraries, Point Code Library, etc.). See also Manager.

Linear Units
The linear units you set for your project control length and distance units and other units derived
from them. There are two possible unit settings, English or metric. Set the units for a new project by
selecting a prototype with the appropriate units.

Manager
This is a generic term used to define a collection of items that are contained within a project or
subproject (Alignments, Batch Files, Surface Models, etc.).
See also Library.

Node
This is the text and symbol that are placed into the CAD graphic (or external database) that identify
points (Northing, Easting, elevation coordinate triplets) to reference within various products.

174 Eagle Point Menu

Node Attribute Style
A Node attribute style controls the way a Node is annotated into the CAD graphic. You can set CAD
attributes of layer/level, color and text style/font for each piece of annotation (Node ID, Description,
Northing, Easting, Elevation and Station and Offset).

Node (Field Code) Library

This is the collection of Field Codes used within all projects. Multiple Node Libraries may be defined
and used at any time within the course of completing a project.

Plot File Locations

Plot files that Eagle Point creates are placed in plot file locations. By default, when you add a project
the plot files are stored in the same location as the project. You may, however, use the Advanced
button on the New Project dialog box (Figure 2-3 on page 6) to set the Plot File Location to be
somewhere other than in the project folder.

Products
Products are the individual modules that contain specific functionality for completing certain tasks.
They are accessed from the Eagle Point menu and contain their own menus from which you can
access certain commands.

Project
A project is the collection of drawings/design files and data files that comprise a job. Commands
executed in Eagle Point require that a project be loaded. The Open Project dialog box shows the
listing of all projects currently defined in Eagle Point, from which any project, subproject or additional
CAD graphic may be loaded. The collection of projects is stored in the Project Library
(PROJECTS.LIB) file.

Project Description
This is the user-supplied name for the project. It is the name that appears in the Open Project dialog
box that you highlight to open the project.

Project Drawing/Design File

This is the drawing/design file that is the main “plan” drawing for the project. If you don’t add any
more drawing/design files to your project, this file is used to place all plan CAD objects into.

Project Formats
Three categories make up the project formats: Horizontal Direction, Nodes and Stationing. Setting
the format of these three categories affects the entire project. Set the default horizontal direction
format to Bearing, Geometric, North Azimuth or South Azimuth. Format Node IDs to be numeric or
alphanumeric, and if you want point protection on. Change the format of the Stationing category to
set the + and 0 (zero) convention for reporting stationing within the project.

Project Precision
Project precision controls the number of decimal places reported within the software for Angular,
Linear, Planimetric Area, Dry Volumes, Wet Volumes and Stationing units. Edit fields within the
products show these values to the maximum allowed (usually 8 decimal places).

Project Preview
A graphic “snapshot” of the project. To create a preview image for the project, use the camera icon
on the Open Project dialog box and select the objects in CAD that you wish to see in the preview
window.

Glossary of Terms 175

 Project Properties
Project properties refers to information about the current or open project, such as where the project
is located, who created the project, who modified it last and how many files are contained within the
project. A project history is also compiled to note the times and dates users opened the project. A
project manifest shows where the data files and CAD graphic files are located and what they are
called. Client information such as client names, contacts and phone numbers may be entered into
the project here as well.

Project Shortcut
A shortcut is an icon that is placed onto the desktop that provides access to any Eagle Point project,
subproject or additional plan CAD graphic, bypassing the Open Project dialog box. Create a
shortcut by highlighting the desired project on the Open Project dialog box and selecting the Create
Shortcut icon.

Project Units
Project units are controls what units are used for Angular, Degree of Curvature, Linear and
Planimetric Area categories for the entire project. Edit fields within the software assume the project
unit setting for these categories unless an alternate unit is labeled next to the edit field.

Prototype Drawing
This refers to the drawing that is used as the basis for creating new drawings within the software. It
may contain your organization’s standards such as layer, colors, borders and logos. Every new
drawing created using the New command within the Eagle Point software, must have a prototype.
Use the blank drawings shipped with the software if you don’t have a prototype of your own. If a
drawing that is to be used in a project already exists, use the Select Prototype Drawing button to
browse your Windows file system for the drawing. The prototype drawing edit field is disabled when
an existing drawing is selected to use in a project.
MicroStation users see Seed File below.

Prototype Settings
Prototype settings are used to establish a new project’s units, formats, precision, CAD settings and
layer/level groups. The Eagle Point software ships with two prototypes for these settings, Eagle
Point English Defaults and Eagle Point Metric Defaults. Create your own prototype settings by
setting the units, formats, CAD settings, etc., to your organization’s standards within a project and
use the Prototype Settings command found in the System Mainframe to copy the current settings to
your own prototype name. Use that name as the prototype settings when creating new projects.

Seed File
A seed file is the design file that is used as the basis for creating new design files within the
software. It may contain your organization’s standards, such as working units, level names, colors,
borders and logos. Every new design file created using the New command within the Eagle Point
software must have a seed file. Use the blank seed files shipped with the software if you don’t have
a seed file of your own. If a design file already exists that is to be used in a project, use the Select
Design File button to browse your Windows file system for the design file. The Seed File edit field is
disabled when an existing design file is selected to use in a project.
AutoCAD/BricsCad users see Prototype Drawing, above.

Subproject
A subproject is a portion of the project that is specific to a certain aspect of design. They are
commonly used when multiple road designs or sewer networks are required. They may also be used
for comparing alternatives for a single design project. The RoadCalc™, Storm and Sanitary
Sewers and Water Surface Profiling products require the use of subprojects.

176 Eagle Point Menu

Subproject Description
This refers to the user-supplied name for a subproject. It is the name that appears in the Open
Project dialog box that you highlight to open the subproject.

Subproject Number
This refers to the user-supplied three digit number for a subproject. This number is used by Eagle
Point for file naming purposes. A project cannot have the same subproject number used more than
once within it.

Symbol Organizer
This is a centrally located library that contains different categories of symbols that are used by the
Eagle Point products.

Glossary of Terms 177

178 Eagle Point Menu
INDEX
Symbols
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Numerics
3D Line Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3D Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
A Annotate Depth Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Accusnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Acre-Feet (Hectare-Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Acres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Acres (Hectares) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93, 99, 102
Add new node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
Add to List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 87
Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . 5, 9, 11
Additional Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 65
Additional Symbol Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 65
Additional Symbol Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Additional Symbol Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Additional Symbol Multiplier . . . . . . . . . 62, 65, 80
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Advanced Irrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Advanced Irrigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . 130
Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar Icons . . . . 130
Advanced Irrigation Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Locate Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Locate Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Size Laterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Size Mainlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Drip Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Head Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Jump Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Drip Emitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Locate Drip Subsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Locate Heads by Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Heads on Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Lateral Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Mainline Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Single Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Pipe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Advanced Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Advanced Project Settings Dialog Box . . . . 8
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 163
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
All in Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Analyze Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Angular Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Precision – Angular Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 42
Angular Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Units – Angular Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Annotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71, 140, 148
Annotate Alignment Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Annotate Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Annotate Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Point/Grade Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Annotate Slope Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Annotate Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Apply All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Apply Updates, Do Not Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Arc Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Area Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Array Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ASCII File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Example File for AutoCAD/BricsCad . . . . 58
Example File for MicroStation . . . . . . . . . 59
Assign by Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Block/Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign Grade to Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Attach Curb Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 71
Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 62, 64, 67, 80
Attribute Style Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Attribute Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 68
Attribute Styles Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Attribute Styles Library Dialog Box . . . . . 68
Delete Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Modify Attribute Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
New Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Show Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Auto Locate Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 144
Auto Locate Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Pipe Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto Size Laterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 144
Auto Size Mainlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 144
Automatically Add Blocks from Directory . . . . 54
Automatically Add Cells from Cell Library . . . . 55
Azimuths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
North Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
South Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Index 179
B Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 37, 42
Balance Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Base Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 131
Base Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Base Plan Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Base Plan Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Base Plan Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Block Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Change Block Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contour Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Copy and Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Hatch Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Label Crossings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Label Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Label Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Move and Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Multicopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Multiscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
North Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Running Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Spot Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Batch Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
North East Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
North West Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
South East Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
South West Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Block Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Broadleaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Browse Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 86
Browse Database Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 86
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Bypass Confirmation of All Further Adds 91, 92, 93
C Create ColorFast Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 133
C.S.I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CAD Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 126
Default CAD Settings –
AutoCAD/BricsCad Dialog Box . . . . . 46
Default CAD Settings – MicroStation
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Select Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 154, 158
Calculate Prismoidal Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculate Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Capture Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Capture Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 119
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
180 Eagle Point Menu
Cell Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 59
Cell Library and Design File Considerations . . 28
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Change Block Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Check Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Check-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Check-out/Return License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Check-out/Return License Dialog Box . . 168
Chi Square Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Chord Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clean-up Intersection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Clear List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 87
Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Client Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Client Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
COGO Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . 136
Convert Objects to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Edit Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . 136
Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . 136
Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Report Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Report Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Snap Nodes to Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Color . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 61, 64, 70, 72, 74, 76, 80
ColorFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ColorFast Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ColorFast Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ColorFast Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ColorFast Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Define Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Open ColorFast Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Position Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Column Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Command Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Common Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Compute Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 28
Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Eagle Point Additional Drawing/Design
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Intelligent Indexing . . . . . . . . . 4
 Eagle Point Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . 30, 81
MicroStation V8 Considerations . . . . . . . . 28
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Point Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Conditions for Rotating View Orientation . . . . 118
Configure Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configuring and Updating Eagle Point . . . . . 170
Confirm Changed Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . 88, 91
Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box . . . 92
Confirm New and Changed Nodes . . . . . . 88, 90
Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box . . . . . . 90
Confirm Change to Target Dialog Box . . . 91
Confirm New Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 92
Confirm Add to Target Dialog Box . . . . . . 92
Conifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 148, 159
Construct Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 134
Construction Details Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Construction Details Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . 134
Construction Details Tool Bar Icons . . . . 134
Construction Details Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Locate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Manage Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Construction Specification Institute . . . . . . . . 149
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Contour Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . 136, 151
Convert Objects to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Convert Objects to Stream Alignment . . . . . . 163
Convert Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Converting Nodes from Softdesk/Land
Development Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 135
COGO Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
COGO Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
COGO Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copy Project / Sub-project Dialog Box . . . 22
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copy and Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Copy Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
Copy Field Code Library Dialog Box . . . . 56
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copy Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 100
Copy Layer Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 100
Copy Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 103
Copy Level Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 103
Copy Project/Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Copy To Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Course Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Create Alignment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create ColorFast Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Create Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Create Jumpline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Create Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Lot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Create New Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Create New Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Create New Project/Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Create New Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Create New Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Create Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Create Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Create Shortcut Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Create Shortcut for Your Project/Sub-project . 13
Create Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Create Vegetation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Created By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Crossing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 151, 163
Cubic Feet (Cubic Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Cubic Yards (NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Current Drawing uses own Database . . . . . . . 82
Current Drawing uses Project Database . . . . 82
Current Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Curved Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 159
Custom Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Customize Menu Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 166
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
D
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 137
Data Collection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Collection Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Collection Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . 137
Data Collection Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3D Line Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Download From Collector . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Edit Formatted File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Edit Instrument File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Export Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Import ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Line Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Manage Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reduce Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Upload to Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Data Files Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Data to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Index 181
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 138
Data Transfer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Data Transfer Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Data Transfer Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . 139
Data Transfer Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Create Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Report Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Report Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 149
Database Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Date Entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Decimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Decimal Degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Default CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Define Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Define Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Degree of Curvature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Units – Degree of Curvature Dialog Box . 34
Degrees, Minutes, Seconds . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 42
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Delete Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Delete Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 78
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Delete Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Delete Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Delete Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Delete Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Delete Old Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Delete Project/Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Delete Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
Delete Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Delineate Floodplain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Delta X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
Delta Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
Depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Description 10, 14, 20, 21, 32, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 59, 61, 64,
67, 83, 84, 87, 91, 92, 93
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Design Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 158
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 134
Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Detention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Dialog Box Caption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dialogs on Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Disable Point Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Display Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Display Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Display record information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Settings Dialog Box – Objects
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Settings Dialog Box – View
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
182 Eagle Point Menu
Do Not Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93
Do Not Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Do Not Place Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Download From Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 140
Drafting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drafting Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drafting Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drafting Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Alignment Stationing . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Annotate Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Annotate Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Alignment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Create Lot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert Bar Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Write Legal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Draw Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Draw Mainline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Draw Pipe Structure to Structure . . . . . . . . . . 149
Draw Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Drawing/Design File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Drip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 144
Drip Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 145
Dry Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Precision – Dry Volume Dialog Box . . . . . 44
Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dynamic Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
E
Eagle Point Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . 4
Eagle Point Intelligent Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Products Tool Bar . . . . . . . . 127
Eagle Point Products Tool Bar Icons . . . 127
Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
List Object Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manage Layer/Level Groups . . . . . . . . . 126
Manipulate Layer/Level Groups . . . . . . . 126
New Project/Subproject/Additional CAD
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Open Project/Sub-Project/Additional
CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
 Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Menu Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . 126
Eagle Point Products Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Base Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Irrigation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Landscape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Quantity Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
RoadCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Site Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Water Surface Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Eagle Point Products Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . 127
Eagle Point Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 5
Eagle Point Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 83, 84, 87, 90, 91, 92
Edge Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Edge Stipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Edit Active File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 163
Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Edit Channel Routing - Convex . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 163
Edit Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Edit Flows/Forcemains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Edit Formatted File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Edit Instrument File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Edit Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Edit Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Edit Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Edit Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Edit Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 152
Edit Reservoir Routing - Storage Indication . . 165
Edit Soil Boring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
EGPT Command Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EGPT Command Key-in Box . . . . . . . . . . 93
Elevation . . . . . 32, 43, 83, 84, 87, 90, 91, 92, 93
Embedded CAD Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Entry by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Entry by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Erase Error Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Example File for AutoCAD/BricsCad . . . . . . . . 58
Example File for MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Existing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Existing Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Export Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Export List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Export Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Export to HEC-RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 81
Browse Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
External Node Database – Lock Nodes
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
External Node Database – Reserve
Nodes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
External Node Database – Setup Tab . . . 81
External Node Database Dialog Box . . . . 81
External Node Database – Lock Nodes Tab . 84
External Nodes Database Dialog Box –
Lock Nodes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
External Node Database – Reserve Nodes
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
External Node Database Dialog Box –
Reserve Nodes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
External Node Database – Setup Tab . . . . . . 81
External Node Database Dialog Box –
Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Graphic and Database, Compare . . . . . . 83
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
F
Fairway Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fences and Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 51, 61, 64, 67
Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . 2, 54, 55, 59, 126
Field Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Field Code Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 25, 126
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Filter the Project/Sub-project Listing . . . . . . . . 13
Find Ponding Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Find selected plant’s records in database . . 148
Flowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 48, 72, 76
Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 41
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 139
Formats Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Horizontal Direction Formats . . . . . . . . . . 38
Index 183
 Nodes Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Stationing Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Freeze Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
From Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
From Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
From Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
From Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
G Intelligent Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Gallons (Liters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Geometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 40
Geometric Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Global Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Global Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47, 52, 79
Global Modify Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Golf Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Gradians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Graph Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Graphic and Database, Compare . . . . . . . . . . 83
Coordinates for Node ID Differ Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Graphics then Database and Compare . . . . . 83
Group Name . . 98, 101, 104, 105, 110, 111, 116
H Islands/Medians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Hardscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Hatch Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Head Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 143
Hectares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 133, 169
About Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring and Updating Eagle Point . 170
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
History Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
History Filter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Horizontal Direction Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Azimuths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Formats – Horizontal Direction Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Geometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hydrograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
I Drip Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ID Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Illustrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Import ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Import Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ASCII File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Import Field Code Library Dialog Box . . . 59
184 Eagle Point Menu
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Import from HEC-RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 37
Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 167
Insert Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert Bar Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insert North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Interaction with Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Interpolate Additional Geometry . . . . . . . . . . 155
Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 141
Attach Curb Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Check Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . 143
Clean-up Intersection Lines . . . . . . . . . . 142
Define Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Display Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Find Ponding Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Intersection Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Intersection Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . 142
Intersection Design Tool Bar Icons . . . . . 142
Intersection Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Lane Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Manage Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pavement Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Project Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Intersection Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Intersection Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Irrigation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 143
Irrigation Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Irrigation Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Irrigation Design Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . 144
Irrigation Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Array Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto Locate Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto Pipe Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto Size Laterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto Size Mainlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configure Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Create Jumpline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Draw Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Draw Mainline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Edge Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Locate Emitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Locate Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Pipe and Label Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144
Subsurface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Islands/Medians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Isolate Active Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Current Layer by Freeze . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Current Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Freeze Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Isolate Layer Group By Off Dialog Box . . 111
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Isolate Level Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Level Group by Off Dialog Box . . 116
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Isolate Object Layer By Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . 108
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Object Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Isolate Object Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Item Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Item ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
J Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Jump Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
K Layers In Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
L Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
Label Crossings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Label Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Label Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Landscape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 145
Landscape Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Landscape Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . 145
Landscape Design Tool Bar Icons . . . . . 145
Landscape Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Broadleaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Conifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Convert Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Create Vegetation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Edge Stipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Edit Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Flowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Modify Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Outline a group of plants . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Palm Cactus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plant Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Shrub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tree Harvest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tree Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Landscape Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Lane Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Last Modified By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Launch CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 61, 70, 74, 107
Layer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Freeze Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Isolate Current Layer by Freeze . . . . . . 109
Isolate Current Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Freeze . . . . . . . 110
Isolate Layer Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . 111
Isolate Object Layer By Freeze . . . . . . . 108
Isolate Object Layer by Off . . . . . . . . . . 109
Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
List Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Set Current Layer by Object . . . . . . . . . 107
Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Thaw Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Turn Off Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Turn On All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On and Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Layer Properties Manager Dialog Box . . 106
Layer Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Layer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 80
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Layers in Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 110, 111
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 135, 142, 154
Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 64, 72, 76, 113
Level Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Isolate Active Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Level Group by Off . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolate Object Level by Off . . . . . . . . . . 115
Level Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
List Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Set Active Level by Object . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn Off Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn On All Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Turn On Previous Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Level Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
View Levels Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Level Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Levels In Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Levels in Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 116
Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Line Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Linear Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Linear Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Precision – Linear Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 43
Linear Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 35
Mixed Linear Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Units – Linear Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Linetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
List Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
List Object Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 106
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Index 185
List Object Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
List Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
List Object Level Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 113
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Locate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Locate Drip Emitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Locate Drip Subsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Locate Emitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Locate Heads by Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Heads on Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Lateral Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Mainline Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Locate Outfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Locate Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Locate Single Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 20
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 104
Lock Nodes Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lock Same Nodes in Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Locked By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 87
Locked Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Locking or Unlocking Database
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Locking or Unlocking Database Records . . . . 85
M Manipulate Level Group Dialog Box . . . . 105
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Eagle Point Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Make Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Intermediate and Index Depth
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Intermediate and Index Slope
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Intermediate and Indexed Contours . . 160
Make Preview of Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Make Slope Projections to Catchline . . . . . . 155
Make Slope Projections to Offset . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Slope Projections to Surface Model . . 155
Make Soil Boring Surface Models . . . . . . . . . 155
Make User-Defined Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Manage Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Manage Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Manage Field Code Libraries . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53
Copy Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Export Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Import Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Manage Field Code Libraries Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
New Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Manage Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Manage Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Manage Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Manage Land Use Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copy Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Layer Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
186 Eagle Point Menu
Manage Layer Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . 98
Modify Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
New Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
New Layer Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Manage Layer/Level Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manage Level Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Copy Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manage Level Groups Dialog Box . . . . . 101
Modify Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
New Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Manage Outlet Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Sub-basins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Manage Unit Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Watersheds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manifest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manifest Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Manipulate Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box . . . . 104
Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Manipulate Layer/Level Groups . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manipulate Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mask Field Codes of Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . 80
Mask Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 65
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Maximum Coordinate Difference . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Merge Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
MicroStation V8 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Accusnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cell Library and Design File
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Interaction with Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Level Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Save as V7 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mixed Linear Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Mixed Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Modify Attribute Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 73
Modify Attribute Item
(AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation) . . . . . 76
Modify Attribute Item (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . 73
Modify Attribute Item
(AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box . . . . 73
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . 76
Modify Attribute Item (MicroStation)
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Modify Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Modify Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Modify Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Modify Item ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Modify Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99
Modify Layer Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . 100
Modify Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102
Modify Level Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . 103
Modify Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Modify Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Modifying Field Codes in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
More Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
More Products Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Move and Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Move Product Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Move Product Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Multicopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Multiscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
N QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 69, 71, 99, 102, 105
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 158
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 91, 92
New Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . . 8
New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
New Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
New Additional Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . 8
New Additional Drawing/Design File
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
New Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69
New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . 69
New Attribute Style (MicroStation) . . . . . . 71
New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . 69
New Attribute Style (AutoCAD/BricsCad)
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
New Attribute Style (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . 71
New Attribute Style (MicroStation)
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
New Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 60
New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . 61
New Field Code (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . 64
Node with Separate Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 60
New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . . 61
New Field Code (AutoCAD/BricsCad)
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
New Field Code (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
New Field Code (MicroStation) Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
New Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
New Field Code Library
(AutoCAD/BricsCad) Dialog Box . . . . 54
New Field Code Library (MicroStation)
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56
New Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
New Layer Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 99
New Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
New Level Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 102
New Node ID to Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Advanced Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
New Project/Subproject/Additional CAD
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
New Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
New Prototype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 67
New Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
New Sub-project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 10
New Sub-project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Node (Field Code) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Attribute Styles Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Global Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Manage Field Code Libraries . . . . . . . . . 53
New Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box . . . 51
Node (Field Code) Library Filters . . . . . . 67
Node (Field Code) Library Print Options . 66
QuickSteps (AutoCAD/BricsCad) . . . . . . 52
QuickSteps (MicroStation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Node (Field Code) Library Filters . . . . . . . . . . 67
Node (Field Code) Library Filters Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Node (Field Code) Library Print Options . . 52, 66
Node (Field Code) Library Print Options
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 84, 86, 87, 91, 92
Node Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Node Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64, 80
Node symbol blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 135
Nodes Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Formats – Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 40
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
North Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
North Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Northing . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 83, 84, 87, 90, 91, 92
Northing/ Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Number of Columns for Left Margin . . . . . . . . 25
Number of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Number of sub-projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
O
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105, 122
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 136
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105, 122
On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
on-line documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 126
Create Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Open Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Index 187
 Project Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Plant Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Open ColorFast Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Plant Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Open plant database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Plant Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Open Project/Sub-Project/Additional CAD Plot Files Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Plot Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Plot Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Plot Scales Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137 Plotted Size/Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Point Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 41
Outline a group of plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Point Protection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Output 33, 34, 35, 37, 142, 151, 153, 158, 159, 163, 164 Position Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Override with Active Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Potential Write Access Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 70, 72, 74, 76
P Angular Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Dry Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
P.O.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Linear Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Page Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Planimetric Area Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Palm Cactus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Precision Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pan Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Station/Offset Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pan Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Wet Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 161
Patio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pavement Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Preview Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 113, 118
Preview Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Preview Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Pipe and Label Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Preview Object Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . 122
Pipe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Preview Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Place Additional Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 80
Preview Object Display Settings . . . . . . . 122
Place Duplicate Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preview Objects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 121
Place Grid Depth Stakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 66
Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Print Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Place Rectangular Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Print Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Place Spot Depth Stakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Print Project/Sub-project Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Place Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Place Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Place Using Field Code’s Layer and Color . . . 62
Print the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Place Using Field Code’s Layer/Level
Printed Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Printed Lines per Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Place Using Field Code’s Level and Color . . . 65
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Product Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Planimetric Area Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126
Precision – Planimetric Area Dialog Box . 43
Advanced Irrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Planimetric Area Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Base Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Units – Planimetric Area Dialog Box . . . . 36
Check-out/Return License . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 146, 147
ColorFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Plant Database Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Plant Database Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Plant Database Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . 147
Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Plant Database Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display record information . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Find selected plant’s records
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Eagle Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Open plant database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Print the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Irrigation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Purge deleted records from database . . 147
Landscape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Search database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
More Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Show plants in CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Plant Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Show selected records only . . . . . . . . . . 147
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Plant Growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Quantity Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Plant Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
RoadCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

188 Eagle Point Menu

 Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Products Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Products Checked Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Products List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Products menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Products Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Profile Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profile from Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Profile from Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 148, 151
Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profiles Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profiles Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profiles Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Annotate Point/Grade Break . . . . . . . . . 149
Construct Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Draw Pipe Structure to Structure . . . . . . 149
Draw Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Profile Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profile from Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Profile from Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Inlet/Manhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setup Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 50
Project and Sub-projects listing . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Project Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 16
Project Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Project Drawing/Design Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Project Filters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Project list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Project Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10
Project listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Project Plan Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15, 126
Project Properties – Client Information
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Properties – Details Tab . . . . . . . . 16
Project Properties – History Tab . . . . . . . . 17
Project Properties – Manifest Tab . . . . . . 18
Project Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 15
Project Properties Print Options . . . . . . . . 20
Project Properties – Client Information Tab . . . 19
Project Properties – Client Information
Tab Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Properties – Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Project Properties Dialog Box – Details
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Project Properties – History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 17
History Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Project Properties Dialog Box – History
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Project Properties – Manifest Tab . . . . . . . . . 18
Project Properties – Manifest Tab
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Project Properties Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Project Properties Print Options Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Project Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 154
prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 41
Prototype Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Prototype Drawing/Seed File . . . . . . . . . 7, 9, 11
Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 48
Delete Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
New Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Prototype Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 49
Pump Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Purge deleted records from database . . . . . 147
Q
Quantity Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 149
Quantity Takeoff Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . 150
Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Block/Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Assign by Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Calculate Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Display Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Manage Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Modify Item ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Quantity Takeoff Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . 150
Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 142, 148
Query Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query Inlet/Manhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Query Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Query Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 124
R
Radians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rainfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 164
Rainfall Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 165
Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86, 87
Read Nodes From Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Recreation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Reduce Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remaining Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Index 189
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 102, 167
Remove from listing and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remove from project listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rename Project/Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 139
Report After Target Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Report Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Report Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 139
Report Only - Do Not Apply Updates . . . . . . . 88
Report Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 139
Reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reserve Nodes Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reserve Same Nodes in Graphic . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reserved By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 138
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Restore Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Restore Iso View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Restore Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RoadCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 127, 150
RoadCalc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
RoadCalc Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
RoadCalc Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
RoadCalc Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . 151
Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Synchronize Alignment Graphics
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data . 152
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
View Cross-Section Graphic . . . . . . . . . 151
View Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
View Typical Section Graphic . . . . . . . . 152
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
RoadCalc™ Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Roads and Sidewalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Rotate View Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Conditions for Rotating View
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rotate View Orientation Dialog Box . . . 118
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
Rotation Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Running Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
190 Eagle Point Menu
S
Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 127, 152
Sanitary Sewers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . 153
Sanitary Sewers Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Save as V7 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Save Settings As Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Scene Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Search database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Select Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Select Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Select new text font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Select Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Select Nodes By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Select Nodes by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selected Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Set Active Level by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Set Current Layer by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 135, 139, 162
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setup Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setup Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Show Attribute Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Show Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Show Attribute Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 78
Show Attribute Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72
Show Error Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Show plants in CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Show selected records only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Shrub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Site Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 154
Site Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Site Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Site Design Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Site Design Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3D Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Analyze Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Annotate Depth Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Annotate Slope Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Assign Grade to Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Balance Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculate Prismoidal Volumes . . . . . . . . 155
Edit Soil Boring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Interpolate Additional Geometry . . . . . . . 155
Make Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Intermediate and Index Depth
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Intermediate and Index Slope
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Slope Projections to Catchline . . . 155
Make Slope Projections to Offset . . . . . . 155
Make Slope Projections to Surface
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make Soil Boring Surface Models . . . . . . 155
Place Grid Depth Stakes . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 Place Spot Depth Stakes . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Project Plan Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Track Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 156
Site Planning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Site Planning Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Site Planning Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . 156
Site Planning Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Area Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Course Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Curved Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fairway Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fences and Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Golf Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Landscape Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Linear Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Patio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Roads and Sidewalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Transmission Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Site Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Snap Nodes to Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Soil Borings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Source to Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
South Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Spot Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Square Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Square Feet (Square Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Station/Offset Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Precision – Station/Offset Dialog Box . . . . 45
Stationing Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Formats – Stationing Dialog Box . . . . . . . 41
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 127, 157
Storm Sewers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Storm Sewers Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Storm Sewers Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . 158
Storm Sewers Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Storm Sewers Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 70, 74
Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 14
Sub-project Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sub-project Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Subsurface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Summary Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 159
Surface Modeling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Surface Modeling Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Surface Modeling Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . 159
Surface Modeling Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Annotate Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Batch Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Crossing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Make Intermediate and Indexed
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Make User-Defined Contours . . . . . . . . 160
Manage Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mask Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Merge Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Place Rectangular Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Place Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Place Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Preview Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Track Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Triangulate Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . 160
Triangulate Surface Model
rom Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 160
Survey Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Survey Adjustment Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . 161
Survey Adjustment Tool Bar Icons . . . . 162
Survey Adjustment Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chi Square Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Compute Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Edit Active File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Entry by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Entry by Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Erase Error Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Manage Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Show Error Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Symbol Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64, 80
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Synchronize Alignment Graphics and Data . 151
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data . . . . 152
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 126
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Default CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Dialogs on Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dynamic Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
EGPT Command Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Embedded CAD Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
External Node Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Node (Field Code) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Update Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
T
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 76
Text Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Thaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Index 191
Thaw Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Time Entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Time Spent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
To Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
To Field Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
To Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tool bar/Products Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tools . . . . . . . . 97, 126, 130, 131, 144, 145, 156
Capture Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Converting Nodes from Softdesk/Land
Development Desktop . . . . . . . . . . 123
Launch CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Layer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Level Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Manage Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Manage Level Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Manipulate Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manipulate Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Plot Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Preview Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rotate View Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Topo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Total Printed Columns Available . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Total Printed Columns Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Total Time Spent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Track Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 160
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 163
Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Transmission Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tree Harvest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tree Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Triangulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Triangulate Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Triangulate Surface Model from Contours . . 160
Turn Off Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Turn Off Object Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn On All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On All Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Turn On and Thaw All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On Previous Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn On Previous Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
U View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . 163
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Angular Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Degree of Curvature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Linear Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Planimetric Area Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Unlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 104
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Update Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Confirm Changed Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . 91
Confirm New and Changed Nodes . . . . . 90
192 Eagle Point Menu
Confirm New Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Update Node Information Dialog Box . . . . 88
Upload to Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Use All DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Use All DWG/DGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Use DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Use DWG/DGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Use Field Code as Line Name in Data
Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 65
Use Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23
Use Font’s Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Use New Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Use New Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Use Project Drawing/Design File . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Use Style’s Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18
V
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 147
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
View Cross-Section Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
View Plan Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
View Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
View Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
View Typical Section Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
View Water Surface Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154
W
Water Surface Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Water Surface Profiling Menu . . . . . . . . . 162
Water Surface Profiling Tool Bar . . . . . . 163
Water Surface Profiling Tool Bar Icons . . 163
Water Surface Profiling Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . 5
Water Surface Profiling Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . 163
Convert Objects to Stream Alignment . . 163
Delineate Floodplain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Export to HEC-RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Import from HEC-RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Preview Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
View Plan Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
View Water Surface Profiles . . . . . . . . . . 163
Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 164
Watershed Modeling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Watershed Modeling Tool Bar . . . . . . . . 164
Watershed Modeling Tool Bar Icons . . . . 165
Watershed Modeling Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Edit Channel Routing - Convex . . . . . . . 165
Edit Reservoir Routing - Storage
Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Graph Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Land Use Groups . . . . . . . . . . . 165
 Manage Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Outlet Structures . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Sub-basins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Unit Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manage Watersheds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rainfall Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Summary Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Watersheds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Wet Volume Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Precision – Wet Volume Dialog Box . . . . . 45
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Write Legal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Write Nodes To Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

X
X-Axis Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
XY Plane Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Z
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 143
Zoom Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Zoom Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Zoom Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Zoom Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Zoom Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Index 193
194 Eagle Point Menu